diff options
| author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2010-06-18 16:19:17 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2010-06-18 16:19:17 +0000 |
| commit | 2c714215c31a63d9e9b11ad3c57cf8ee3a1e5258 (patch) | |
| tree | 8b40b3ce151d1c7468cb8281177d599c12ed4fd3 | |
| parent | 13f006e3f54d8837fdd9933bbf513c569d011e05 (diff) | |
dtk 2009/11/07 v1.20 (17jun10)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@19040 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
41 files changed, 2644 insertions, 6460 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/dtk/beispiel.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/dtk/beispiel.bib deleted file mode 100644 index f5eb82fae21..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bib/dtk/beispiel.bib +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% $Id: beispiel.bib,v 1.1 2000/08/06 11:18:33 gene Exp $ -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -@Book{ companion, - author = {Michel Goosens and Frank Mittelbach and Alexander - Samarin}, - title = {The {\LaTeX} Companion}, - publisher = {Addison-Wesley Publishing Company}, - year = {1994}, - address = {Reading, Mass.} -} - -@Book{ knuth:mfbook, - author = {Donald E. Knuth}, - title = {The {\MF book}}, - publisher = {Addison-Wesley Publishing Company}, - year = 1990, - address = {Reading, Mass.}, - edition = 5, - volume = {C}, - series = {Computers and Typesetting} -} - -@Book{ knuth:texbook, - author = {Donald E. Knuth}, - title = {The {\TeX book}}, - publisher = {Addison-Wesley Publishing Company}, - address = {Reading, Mass.}, - year = 1989, - edition = {15}, - volume = {A}, - series = {Computers and Typesetting} -} - -@Book{ kopka:latex, - author = {Helmut Kopka}, - title = {{\LaTeX} -- Eine Einf{\"u}hrung}, - publisher = {Addison-Wesley Publishing Company}, - address = {Bonn}, - year = 1993 -} - -@Book{ kopka:latex2, - author = {Helmut Kopka}, - title = {{\LaTeX}-Erg{\"a}nzungen -- mit einer Einf{\"u}hrung in - {\MF}}, - publisher = {Addison-Wesley Publishing Company}, - address = {Bonn}, - year = 1995 -} - -@Book{ lamport:latex.2, - author = {Leslie Lamport}, - title = {{\LaTeX}: A Document Preparation System}, - publisher = {Addison-Wesley Publishing Company}, - year = {1994}, - address = {Reading, Mass.}, - edition = {2} -} - -@Article{ neugebauer:klasse, - author = {Gerd Neugebauer}, - title = {Eine Klasse f{\"u}r {\glqq}Die {\TeX}nische - Kom{\"o}die{\grqq}}, - journal = dtk, - year = 1995, - volume = {3/95}, - pages = {6-14} -} - -@Misc{ twg:tds, - author = {TUG Working Group on a \TeX{} Directory Structure}, - title = {A Directory Structure for {\TeX} Files}, - howpublished = {Draft version 0.9991}, - year = 1996, - month = nov, - note = {CTAN: - \texttt{tex-archive/""tds/""working-paper/""tds-0.9991.tar.gz}} -} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/README deleted file mode 100644 index 5ca6ba3e1c6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/README +++ /dev/null @@ -1,83 +0,0 @@ - - dtk: A Document Class and Style for - ``Die TeXnische Komoedie'' - the journal of the german speaking TeX users group - - original written by - Gerd Neugebauer - gene@gerd-neugebauer.de - - -dtk is a document class and style file which has been written to be -used for the communications of the German speaking TeX users group -Dante e.V.: ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. - -For changes from the previous versions see the end of this file. - -The distribution consists of the following files (if one is missing -then complain at the distributor of your version): - -dtk.dtx - This is the main distribution file. It contains the class and - style file. LaTeXing this file produces the English documentation. -dtk.ins - This is the driver file for the extraction procedure. You need - the doc utility to unpack it. -dtk.bst - This is the BibTeX style file to be used for ``Die TeXnische - Komoedie''. -ReadMe - This file. -beipiel.tex - A short description example for dtk (in German). -beispiel.ltx - The driver file for beispiel.tex. Run this file through LaTeX to - get the dvi file. -beispiel.bib - The bibliography for beispiel.tex. - - -INSTALLATION ------------- - -(0) If you have obtained the unpacked distribution, i.e. you - already have cls and clo files, then continue with step (2). - -(1) Run TeX or LaTeX on dtk.ins. - - This should produce the files dtk.cls, dtk.sty, dtklogos.sty, - dtk.ist, and some dtk*.clo files. - - This might fail due to several reasons. In this case revert to - the unpacked files which are also distributed at the same - place where you got the sources from. - -(2) Move dtk.cls and the dtk*.clo files to a place where LaTeX - searches for class files. Move dtk.sty to a place where LaTeX - searches for style files. - - The suggested place for the LaTeX files in a TDS conform - installation is the directory - - TEXMF/tex/latex/supported/dtk - - where TEXMF is the root of the TDS installation tree. - -(3) Run LaTeX on dtk.dtx to produce the documentation. LaTeX2e - is required for this step. - - Usually the documentation contains a general part describing - the use of the class/style and the description of the - implementation details. If you want to omit the implementation - description you can create the file dtk.dcf before compiling - the documentation. This file should contain the following - lines: - - \OnlyDescription - \endinput - -(4) Run LaTeX, BibTeX, and LaTeX twice again on beispiel.ltx for a - short description and a sample in German. - - -y
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/beispiel.ltx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/beispiel.ltx deleted file mode 100644 index 2ecd76659fa..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/beispiel.ltx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -\documentclass[07]{dtk}% load class options 07 -%% -%% Packete/Style-Optionen und anderes Material in der Pr"aambel: -%% -\usepackage{booktabs} -%% -%% Das Packet german/ngerman wird automatisch geladen und sollte nicht -%% explizit angefordert werden. -%% -%% Regel: Es sollten so wenig wie m"oglich zus"atzliche Packete -%% angefordert werden, da diese mit anderen Packeten in Konflikt -%% geraten k"onnten, die in anderen Artikeln unbedingt -%% ben"otigt werden. -%% Regel: Es sollten nicht unn"otig viele Kommandos oder Umgebungen -%% definiert werden (aus demselben Grund). N"otigenfalls -%% sollte die Definition im Artikel und nicht in der Pr"aambel -%% geschehen. -%% Regel: Bei der Produktion der Zeitschrift wird normalerweise das -%% Input-Encoding utf8 verwendet, sofern nicht ein Beitrag -%% unbedingt etwas anderes erforderlich macht. -%% Es darf kein ein anderes Input-Encoding verwendet werden, wenn -%% wie unten gezeigt eine lokale Umschaltung erfolgt. -%% -\begin{document} -% -% Nun wird nur noch der eigentliche Beitrag geladen. Alles weitere -% findet in der Datei beispiel.tex statt. -% -%% Die Vereinszeitschrift wird mit dem Input-Encoding -%% utf8 gesetzt. Wenn man eine andere Kodierung bevorzugt, -%% dann den Textteil in -%% \bgroup -%% \inputencoding{...} -%% \input{beispiel} -%% \egroup -%% -\input{beispiel} -% -% -\end{document} -% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/beispiel.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/beispiel.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 49409222b7b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/beispiel.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,257 +0,0 @@ -%%***************************************************************************** -%% $Id: beispiel.tex,v 1.4 2001/10/21 15:17:13 gene Exp $ -%%***************************************************************************** -%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer -%%----------------------------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% Dies ist ein Beispieldokument zu einem Artikel für "`Die TeXnische -%% Kom"odie"'. Dieses soll die Struktur aufzeigen, die solch ein Artikel -%% haben sollte. Au"serdem sind hier die speziellen Makros im Einsatz -%% zu sehen und es werden einige Regeln vermittelt, die es zu beachten -%% gilt. -%% -%% Diese Datei enthält nur den eigentlichen Artikel. Diese Datei kann -%% nicht alleine von LaTeX bearbeitet werden. Hierzu ist der Treiber -%% in der Datei beispiel.ltx notwendig. Die Übersetzung des Beitrags -%% geschieht mit -%% -%% latex beispiel.ltx -%% -%%----------------------------------------------------------------------------- - -%%----------------------------------------------------------------------------- -%% -%% Das Paket german/ngerman wird automatisch geladen und sollte nicht -%% explizit angefordert werden. -%% -%% Regel: Es sollten so wenig wie m"oglich zus"atzliche Pakete -%% angefordert werden, da diese mit anderen Paketen in Konflikt -%% geraten k"onnten, die in anderen Artikeln unbedingt -%% ben"otigt werden. -%% Regel: Es sollten nicht unn"otig viele Kommandos oder Umgebungen -%% definiert werden (aus demselben Grund). N"otigenfalls -%% sollte die Definition im Artikel und nicht in der Pr"aambel -%% geschehen. -%% Regel: Es darf kein spezielles inputencoding verwendet werden. Die -%% Eingabe muss reines ASCII sein. -%% Bei Bedarf kann als letzter Schritt die Umwandlung der -%% Sonderzeichen in pures ASCII erfolgen (z.B. mit recode) -%% - -%%----------------------------------------------------------------------------- -%% Angabe des Titels der Arbeit. -\title{Der Titel, der auch so lang sein kann, dass er nicht mehr in die - Kopfzeile passt} - -%%----------------------------------------------------------------------------- -%% Angabe der Autoren. Mehrere Autoren sind durch \and getrennt. -%% Die Vornamen m"oglichst nicht abk"urzen. -\author{A. Utor\and J.E. Mand} - -%%----------------------------------------------------------------------------- -%% Angabe der Adressen der Autoren. Jeder Autor ist mit einer eigenen -%% \address-Anweisung vertreten. -%% Das erste Argument enth"alt (Titel und) Vornamen. -%% Das zweite Argument enth"alt die restlichen Namensbestandteile -%% (hiernach wird sortiert). -%% Das dritte Argument enth"at die Adresse. Die Bestandteile der -%% Adresse sind durch \\ voneinander getrennt. -\address{A.}{Utor}{Eine Stra"se 11\\11111 Irgendwo} -\address{J.E.}{Mand}{Weiter Weg 22\\99999 Hinterm Berg} - -%%----------------------------------------------------------------------------- -%% Hier wird der Titel gesetzt. -\maketitle - -%%----------------------------------------------------------------------------- -%% Die Definition von lokalen Makros und Umgebungen erfolgt hier. -\newcommand{\bs}{\symbol{`\\}} - -%%----------------------------------------------------------------------------- -%% Falls der Titel sehr lang ist, muss hier eine kurze Fassung f"ur die -%% Kopfzeile angegeben werden. Ansonsten kann diese Anweisung wegfallen. -\markboth{Der Kurztitel}{Der Kurztitel} - -%%----------------------------------------------------------------------------- -\begin{abstract} - Der Abstract enth"alt eine kurze Zusammenfassung der Problemstellung, - die in dem Artikel behandelt wird. Hier soll der Leser einen Hinweis - bekommen, ob der Artikel interessant ist, oder erst sp"ater gelesen - werden kann. -\end{abstract} - -\section{Einleitung} - -In der Einleitung sollte das Problem motiviert werden, das in diesem -Artikel behandelt wird. Wir behandeln hier das Vorbereiten von -Artikeln f"ur \DTK. Normalerweise wird das etwas l"anger ausfallen. - -\section{Jetzt geht's los} - -Es k"onnen alle \LaTeX-Konstrukte verwendet werden, die im -\texttt{article}-Style definiert sind. Dabei sind allerdings einige -Einschr"ankungen zu beachten. - -\begin{itemize} -\item Die Abschnitte sind nicht nummeriert. Deshalb macht es keinen - Unterschied, ob \verb|\section| oder \verb|\section*| verwendet - wird. Der Einfachheit halber sollte deshalb \verb|\section| benutzt - werden. Analoges gilt f"ur Unterabschnitte etc. -\item Die Papiergr"o"se ist DIN A5. Das muss ber"ucksichtigt werden, wenn - Figuren oder Tabellen entworfen werden. -\item Es d"urfen keine globalen Parameter umdefiniert werden, da dies - andere Artikel st"oren k"onnte. Insbesondere ist die Schriftgr"o"se - festgelegt. -\item Es sollten keine Randnotizen (\verb|\marginpar|) benutzt werden - (Es ist einfach kein ausreichender Rand vorhanden). -\end{itemize} - -Die Makros in der Tabelle~\ref{tab:logos} stehen zus"atzlich zur -Verf"ugung und sollten an den entsprechenden Stellen auch benutzt -werden. -\begin{table}[t] - \begin{center} - \caption{Logos in dtk.cls}\label{tab:logos} - - \begin{tabular}{ll}\toprule - \emph{Marko} & \emph{Ergebnis}\\\midrule - \texttt{\bs AMSLaTeX} & \AMSLaTeX \\ - \texttt{\bs AMSTeX} & \AMSTeX \\ - \texttt{\bs AMS} & \AMS \\ - \texttt{\bs BibTeX} & \BibTeX \\ - \texttt{\bs dante} & \dante \\ - \texttt{\bs Dante} & \Dante \\ - \texttt{\bs DTK} & \DTK \\ - \texttt{\bs emTeX} & \emTeX \\ - \texttt{\bs eTeX} & \eTeX \\ - \texttt{\bs LAmSTeX} & \LAmSTeX \\ - \texttt{\bs LaTeXTeX} & \LaTeXTeX \\ - \texttt{\bs LaTeXe} & \LaTeXe \\ - \texttt{\bs MF} & \MF \\ - \texttt{\bs MP} & \MP \\ - \texttt{\bs MakeIndex} & \MakeIndex \\ - \texttt{\bs NTS} & \NTS \\ - \texttt{\bs PS} & \PS \\ - \texttt{\bs PiCTeX} & \PiCTeX \\ - \texttt{\bs PubliCTeX} & \PubliCTeX \\ - \texttt{\bs SliTeX} & \SliTeX \\ - \texttt{\bs TeXXeT} & \TeXXeT \\ - \texttt{\bs TeXeT} & \TeXeT \\\bottomrule - \end{tabular} - \end{center} -\end{table} - -Beim Setzen von Verzeichnisnamen, E-Mail-Adressen, URLs und "ahnlichem -tritt oft das Problem auf, dass diese nicht getrennt werden k"onnen, -wenn sie in \verb|\texttt| gesetzt sind. Zu diesem Zweck wurde von -dieser Klasse das Makro \verb|\Path| bereitgestellt, das sein Argument -in der Nichtproportionalschrift setzt und die Trennung an gewissen -Stellen erlaubt. Damit ist es dann m"oglich, auch lange URLs wie die -folgende zu setzen: -\Path{http://www.gerd-neugebauer.de/software/TeX/}. - -Bei dieser Gelegenheit sind die Tilde \verb|~| und der Unterstrich -\verb|_| keine aktiven Zeichen mehr und k"onnen damit direkt -eingegeben werden. - -Leider ist \verb|\Path| fragil. Das hei"st, dass es in Argumenten von -anderen Makros unerwartete Resultate liefern kann und somit dort nicht -gebraucht werden sollte. - - -\section{Tabellen} - -\begin{enumerate} -\item Tabellen sollten normalerweise als Floats ausgef"uhrt werden. - Damit ist es f"ur \LaTeX{} m"oglich, einen geeigneten Ort f"ur deren - Plazierung zu finden. In der Regel sollte als Plazierungsargument - \verb|[tp]| angegeben werden. -\item Tabellen sollten eine Unterschrift (\verb|\caption|) tragen und - "uber eine Referenz im laufenden Text verankert werden. -\item Auf "uberfl"ussigen Schmuck, wie Rahmen und Linien sollte - verzichtet werden. Meistens kann man "uber angemessene Formatierung - bessere Ergebnisse erreichen als durch zus"atzliche Linien. -\item Die mit \verb|\label| vergebenen Namen sind lokal f"ur jeden - Artikel. Hier braucht keine R"ucksicht auf andere Artikel genommen zu - werden. -\end{enumerate} - -Ein Beispiel ist in der Tabelle~\ref{tab:logos} zu sehen. - - -\section{Goldene Regeln} - -In diesem Abschnitt werden Regeln f"ur den Satz deutscher Texte -gesammelt. Diese sind von allgemeinerem Interesse. Die Erfahrung hat -gezeigt, dass diese Regeln trotzdem nicht allgemein bekannt sind, oder -angewendet werden. - -\begin{enumerate} -\item Es gilt die deutsche Rechtschreibung, wie sie im Duden - festgelegt ist! Seit der Ausgabe 1/2000 wird die 21. Auf\/lage des - Duden zu Grunde gelegt. -\item Die Satzzeichen Punkt, Komma, Semikolon, Ausrufezeichen und - Fragezeichen folgen ohne Zwischenraum auf das davorstehende Wort. -\item Bei Abk"urzungen folgt nach einem inneren Punkt ein kleiner - Zwischenraum: - z.\,B. wird als \verb|z.\,B.| eingegeben. - - Am Anfang eines Satzes werden Abk"urzungen ausgeschrieben. Im - Allgemeinen ist es ratsam, Abkürzungen nur sehr sparsam einzusetzen. - So kann man "`z.\,B."' immer durch "`beispielsweise"' ersetzen. -\item Hervorhebungen erfolgen mit \verb|\emph|. \verb|\textbf| ist f"ur - Hervorhebungen \emph{nicht}\/ zu\-l"assig! -\item Die Gedankenstriche -- werden als \verb|--| eingegeben. Davor - und danach ist ein Leerraum zu lassen. -\item Ein Bereich von Zahlen wird mit \verb|--| gebildet. Hierbei sind - davor und danach \emph{keine}\/ Leerzeichen einzuf"ugen: - 21--34 -\item Bindestriche zwischen Worten werden mit \verb|-| eingegeben. - Davor und danach sind keine Leerzeichen zul"assig. -\end{enumerate} - - -\section{Literatur} - -Literatur sollte mit \BibTeX{} verwaltet werden. - -\begin{itemize} -\item Es git einen speziellen \BibTeX-Style \texttt{dtk.bst}, der mit - der Klasse \verb|dtk.cls| verteilt wird. Dieser sollte verwendet - werden. -\item Die Literatur muss in einer \BibTeX-Datei gesammelt sein. Diese - muss denselben Basisnamen haben wie das eigentliche Dokument. -\item Alternativ kann die Literatur in dem Dokument direkt angegeben - werden. In diesem Fall k"onnen die Beipiele am Ende dieses Dokuments - oder in der Zeitschrift "`\DTK"' "ur das Aussehen dienen. Davon wird - allerdings dringend abgeraten. -\end{itemize} - -An dieser Stelle kommen einige Beispiele f"ur Literaturzitate. Eine -Kurzbeschreibung der Klasse und deren Entstehung wurde in -\cite{neugebauer:klasse} ver"offentlicht. - -Angefangen hat alles mit einigen B"uchern von Donald Knuth -\cite{knuth:texbook,knuth:mfbook}. Der Klassiker zu \LaTeX{} stammt -von Leslie Lamport \cite{lamport:latex.2}. Neuerdings gibt es den -"`Companion"' \cite{companion}. Schlie"slich sollen auch noch B"ucher auf -Deutsch nicht verschwiegen werden \cite{kopka:latex,kopka:latex2}. - -Schlie"slich muss auch noch die \TeX-Directory-Structure -\cite{twg:tds} erw"ahnt werden, da das ein Beipiel f"ur eine Referenz -ins CTAN enth"alt. - - -\section{Zusammenfassung} - -Hier sollte noch einmal ein Resum\'e gezogen werden. Auch ein Ausblick -oder eine Diskussion von offenen Problemen kann hier erfolgen. - -Eine letzte Bitte sei hier noch angebracht. Das Dokument, das zur -Ver"offentlichung f"ur "`\DTK"' eingereicht wird, sollte m"oglichst -ohne Fehler durch \LaTeX{} bearbeitet werden k"onnen. Dazu z"ahlen -auch "`l"a"sliche S"unden"' wie overfull/underfull Boxes. - -\bibliography{beispiel} - -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.bib new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..59465c7e2b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.bib @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +@Book{voss:2008, + author = {Herbert Vo{\ss}}, + title = {{PSTricks} -- {G}rafik f\"ur {\TeX} und {\LaTeX}}, + edition = {5.}, + publisher = {DANTE -- Lob.media}, + year = {2008}, + address = {Heidelberg/""Hamburg} +} + +@Manual{pakin:2008, + Title = {The Comprehensive {\LaTeX} Symbol list}, + Author = {Pakin, Scott}, + Organization = {CTAN}, + annote = {\ctanurl{/info/symbols/comprehensive/symbol-a4.pdf}}, + Note = {}, + year = {2008}, +} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..0fec23d476d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4d71fe3d9d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/doc/beispiel.tex @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ +\documentclass[10,ngerman]{dtk} +\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} +%\usepackage[latin9]{inputenc} + +\begin{document} +\title{Die \texttt{dtk}-Klasse, \small Version \DTKversion -- \DTKdate} +\author{Rolf Niepraschk\and Herbert Voß} +\address{Herbert}{Voß} + {Wasgenstraße~21\\ + 14129 Berlin\\ + \protect\url{herbert@dante.de}} +\address{Rolf}{Niepraschk}% + {Persiusstr.~12\\ + 10245~Berlin\\ + \protect\url{Rolf.Niepraschk@gmx.de}} +\maketitle + +\section{Makros} + +\begin{verbatim} +\providecommand\File[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\providecommand\Package[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\providecommand\Program[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\providecommand\Command[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\providecommand\Macro[1]{\texttt{\#1}} +\providecommand\Environment[1]{\texttt{#1}} +\let\Email\url +\providecommand\Acronym[1]{\textsc{#1}} +\end{verbatim} + +Die Dateien \File{dtk.clo} und \File{10.clo} beinhalten die Klassenoptionen und +werden nur fortgeschreiben, wenn etwas Neues einzufügen ist. Das Paket +\Package{dtk} sollte nur um wichtige Pakete ergänzt werden, die für den Inhalt +des Manuskripts wichtig sind. Das Programm \Program{pdflatex} sollte bevorzugt +zum Ãœbersetzen eingesetzt werden. Macros wie \Macro{texttt} müssen nicht mit +dem Backslash angegeben werden, der wird automatisch gesetzt. Es folgen +Beispiele mit Listings in nummerierter und in nichtnummerierter Art: + +\begin{lstlisting}[style=DTKlstNumber] +\begin{itemize} +\item ... +\end{itemize} +\end{lstlisting} + +\begin{lstlisting}[style=DTKlstNoNumber] +\begin{description} +\item ... +\end{description} +\end{lstlisting} + +\Acronym{Ubuntu} wird als Akronym gesetzt. +Weitere Informationen für Autoren findet man im DTK-Wiki: +\url{http://projekte.dante.de/DanteFAQ/WebHome}. + +Zm Schluss folgt der Quelltext dieses Beispieldokumentes: +\lstinputlisting[style=DTKlstNumber,language={[AlLaTeX]{TeX}}]{\jobname.tex} + +\section{Listen} +\begin{itemize} +\item Bei \Environment{itemize} werden +die Elemente durch Punkte und andere Symbole gekennzeichnet. +\item Listen kann man auch verschachteln: + \begin{itemize} + \item Die maximale Schachtelungstiefe ist~4.~\cite{voss:2008} + \item + Bezeichnung und Ein\-rückung der Elemente + wechseln automatisch. + \end{itemize} +\item usw. +\end{itemize} + +\begin{enumerate} +\item Bei \Environment{enumerate} werden +die Elemente mit Ziffern oder Buchstaben numeriert. +\item Die Numerierung erfolgt automatisch.~\cite{pakin:2008} +\item Listen kann man auch +verschachteln: + \begin{enumerate} + \item Die maximale Schachtelungstiefe + ist~4. + \item Bezeichnung und Ein\-rückung der Elemente + wechseln automatisch. + \end{enumerate} +\item usw. +\end{enumerate} + +\begin{description} +\item[Gelse:] + ein kleines Tier, das + östlich des Semmering Touristen verjagt. +\item[Gemse:] + ein großes Tier, das + westlich des Semmering von Touristen verjagt wird. +\item[G"urteltier:] + ein mittelgroßes Tier, das + hier nur wegen der Länge seines Namens vorkommt. +\end{description} + +\section{Bibliografie} +Die folgende Bibliografie hat nur einen +Demonstrationscharakter. + +\begin{lstlisting}[style=DTKlstNumber] +\begingroup +\RaggedRight +\bibliography{\jobname} +\endgroup +\end{lstlisting} + + +\begingroup +\RaggedRight +\bibliography{\jobname} +\endgroup + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk00.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk00.clo new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f74b397e28a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk00.clo @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +%% +%% This is file `dtk00.clo', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% dtk.dtx (with options: `2000') +%% +%% IMPORTANT NOTICE: +%% +%% For the copyright see the source file. +%% +%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed +%% with new filenames distinct from dtk00.clo. +%% +%% For distribution of the original source see the terms +%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx. +%% +%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the +%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the +%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be +%% in the same archive or directory.) +%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv" +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $ +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% Purpose: +%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. +%% +%% Documentation: +%% The documentation can be generated from the original file +%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to +%% get the full documentation in DVI format. +%% +%% +%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer +%% Mainzer Str. 8 +%% 56321 Rhens (Germany) +%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer +%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige +%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V. +%% +%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts +%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for +%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless +%% he says so in writing. +%% +%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute +%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any +%% modifications are indicated. +%% +%% +%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with +%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality. +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\emergencystretch = 0pt +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `dtk00.clo'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk07.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk01.clo index 2b86288d557..bde8cecf9d3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk07.clo +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk01.clo @@ -1,17 +1,17 @@ %% -%% This is file `dtk07.clo', +%% This is file `dtk01.clo', %% generated with the docstrip utility. %% %% The original source files were: %% -%% dtk.dtx (with options: `2006|2007') +%% dtk.dtx (with options: `2001') %% %% IMPORTANT NOTICE: %% %% For the copyright see the source file. %% %% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed -%% with new filenames distinct from dtk07.clo. +%% with new filenames distinct from dtk01.clo. %% %% For distribution of the original source see the terms %% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx. @@ -77,4 +77,4 @@ %%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \endinput %% -%% End of file `dtk07.clo'. +%% End of file `dtk01.clo'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk02.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk02.clo new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..730b3b8f3af --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk02.clo @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +%% +%% This is file `dtk02.clo', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% dtk.dtx (with options: `2002') +%% +%% IMPORTANT NOTICE: +%% +%% For the copyright see the source file. +%% +%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed +%% with new filenames distinct from dtk02.clo. +%% +%% For distribution of the original source see the terms +%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx. +%% +%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the +%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the +%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be +%% in the same archive or directory.) +%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv" +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $ +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% Purpose: +%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. +%% +%% Documentation: +%% The documentation can be generated from the original file +%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to +%% get the full documentation in DVI format. +%% +%% +%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer +%% Mainzer Str. 8 +%% 56321 Rhens (Germany) +%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer +%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige +%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V. +%% +%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts +%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for +%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless +%% he says so in writing. +%% +%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute +%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any +%% modifications are indicated. +%% +%% +%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with +%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality. +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\newcommand\DTK@bibliography@rightskip{} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `dtk02.clo'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk03.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk03.clo new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..308c03daa46 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk03.clo @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +%% +%% This is file `dtk03.clo', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% dtk.dtx (with options: `2003') +%% +%% IMPORTANT NOTICE: +%% +%% For the copyright see the source file. +%% +%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed +%% with new filenames distinct from dtk03.clo. +%% +%% For distribution of the original source see the terms +%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx. +%% +%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the +%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the +%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be +%% in the same archive or directory.) +%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv" +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $ +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% Purpose: +%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. +%% +%% Documentation: +%% The documentation can be generated from the original file +%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to +%% get the full documentation in DVI format. +%% +%% +%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer +%% Mainzer Str. 8 +%% 56321 Rhens (Germany) +%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer +%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige +%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V. +%% +%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts +%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for +%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless +%% he says so in writing. +%% +%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute +%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any +%% modifications are indicated. +%% +%% +%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with +%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality. +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `dtk03.clo'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk05.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk05.clo new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b0ffd03612c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk05.clo @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ +%% +%% This is file `dtk05.clo', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% dtk.dtx (with options: `2005') +%% +%% IMPORTANT NOTICE: +%% +%% For the copyright see the source file. +%% +%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed +%% with new filenames distinct from dtk05.clo. +%% +%% For distribution of the original source see the terms +%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx. +%% +%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the +%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the +%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be +%% in the same archive or directory.) +%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv" +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $ +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% Purpose: +%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. +%% +%% Documentation: +%% The documentation can be generated from the original file +%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to +%% get the full documentation in DVI format. +%% +%% +%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer +%% Mainzer Str. 8 +%% 56321 Rhens (Germany) +%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer +%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige +%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V. +%% +%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts +%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for +%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless +%% he says so in writing. +%% +%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute +%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any +%% modifications are indicated. +%% +%% +%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with +%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality. +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +\ProvidesFile{dtk05.clo} + [2006/08/11 v0.1 dtk class option (RN)] + +\renewcommand\CoverArt[3]{% + \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined + %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{ecrm1700 scaled \magstep 5} + %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{lmr12 scaled 2938} + \DeclareFixedFont\CoverTitleFont{\encodingdefault}% + {\rmdefault}{m}{n}{41.26}% + \fi + \ifx\CoverNumberFont\@undefined + %\newfont\CoverNumberFont{ecrm1700 scaled 2986} + \DeclareFixedFont\CoverNumberFont{\encodingdefault}% + {\rmdefault}{m}{n}{51.66}% + \fi + \vspace*{-34pt}\hfill + \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to \textheight{\null\hfill\CoverTitleFont + \journalname\hfill\null}% + \@tempdimb=\ht\@tempboxa + \advance\@tempdimb by\dp\@tempboxa + \hbox to\@tempdimb{% + \vbox to\wd\@tempboxa{% + \vskip\wd\@tempboxa + \vss\rotatebox{90}{\box\@tempboxa}}\hss} \ + \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight} + \begin{minipage}[b]{.7\textwidth}\raggedright + \rule{1em}{0pt}% + \dimen2=\textwidth\advance\dimen2-1em + \parbox{\dimen2}{\CoverArt@font + {\Huge\DANTE}\\ + Deutschsprachige\\ + Anwendervereinigung + \TeX\ \eV}\\[1ex] + \dimen3=\textwidth\advance\dimen3-\CoverArt@gap + \hfill\rule{\dimen3}{\CoverArt@linewidth}% + \\[-\baselineskip]\null\hspace{1em}% + {\CoverArt@small\cover@sub{#1}{#2}{#3}}% + \\[-\baselineskip]\rule{0pt}{.617647\textheight}% + \CoverNumberFont + \null\hfill + \makebox(0,0)[br]{% + \textcolor{CoverArt@grey}{% + \CoverArt@strip@no #1;\hspace{1pt}% + }}% Warum verwendet `\CoverArt@strip@no' \CoverTitleFont? RN + \end{minipage}% +} + +\@tempswafalse +\@ifpackageloaded{ngerman}{\@tempswatrue}{}% +\@ifpackageloaded{german}{\@tempswatrue}{}% +\if@tempswa + \def@dqmacro{`}{\frqq}{\frqq}% + \def@dqmacro{'}{\flqq}{\flqq}% +\else + \@ifpackageloaded{babel}% + {% + \declare@shorthand{german}{"`}{\frqq}% + \declare@shorthand{german}{"'}{\flqq}% + }{}% +\fi +\RequirePackage{showexpl} +\lstset{language=[LaTeX]TeX} +\providecommand\lstverb{% + \leavevmode\bgroup % + \def\lst@boxpos{b}% + \lsthk@PreSet\lstset{flexiblecolumns,basicstyle=\mdseries\ttfamily\normalsize,backgroundcolor={}, + breaklines=false,keywordstyle=\mdseries\ttfamily\normalsize}% + \lsthk@TextStyle + \@ifnextchar\bgroup{\afterassignment\lst@InlineG \let\@let@token}% + \lstinline@} + +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `dtk05.clo'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk06.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk06.clo new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..56dfabf9ea8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk06.clo @@ -0,0 +1,160 @@ +%% +%% This is file `dtk06.clo', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% dtk.dtx (with options: `2006') +%% +%% IMPORTANT NOTICE: +%% +%% For the copyright see the source file. +%% +%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed +%% with new filenames distinct from dtk05.clo. +%% +%% For distribution of the original source see the terms +%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx. +%% +%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the +%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the +%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be +%% in the same archive or directory.) +%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2005-03-23 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG" +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.8 2002/04/10 21:03:42 gene Exp gene $ +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% Purpose: +%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. +%% +%% Documentation: +%% The documentation can be generated from the original file +%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to +%% get the full documentation in DVI format. +%% +%% +%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer +%% Mainzer Str. 8 +%% 56321 Rhens (Germany) +%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer +%% Copyright (C) 1997-2005 DANTE, Deutschsprachige +%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V. +%% +%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts +%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for +%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless +%% he says so in writing. +%% +%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute +%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any +%% modifications are indicated. +%% +%% +%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with +%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality. +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + + +\ProvidesFile{dtk06.clo} + [2007/04/20 v0.01 dtk class option (hv)] + +\renewcommand\CoverArt[3]{% + \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined + %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{ecrm1700 scaled \magstep 5} + %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{lmr12 scaled 2938} + \DeclareFixedFont\CoverTitleFont{\encodingdefault}{\rmdefault}{m}{n}{41.26}% + \fi + \ifx\CoverNumberFont\@undefined + %\newfont\CoverNumberFont{ecrm1700 scaled 2986} + \DeclareFixedFont\CoverNumberFont{\encodingdefault}{\rmdefault}{m}{n}{51.66}% + \fi +\iffalse + \vspace*{-34pt}\hfill + \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to \textheight{\null\hfill\CoverTitleFont + \fontsize{41.26}{42}\selectfont\journalname\hfill\null}% + \@tempdimb=\ht\@tempboxa + \advance\@tempdimb by\dp\@tempboxa + \hbox to\@tempdimb{\kern-20pt% + \vbox to\wd\@tempboxa{% + \vskip\wd\@tempboxa + \vss\rotatebox{90}{\box\@tempboxa}}\hss} \ + \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight} +\fi + \newsavebox\dtk@titlebox + \sbox\dtk@titlebox{\parbox{\textheight}{% + \null\hfill\CoverTitleFont\fontsize{41.26}{42}\selectfont\journalname\hfill\null}} + \hspace*{5pt} + \rotatebox{90}{\usebox\dtk@titlebox}\ + \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight} + \hfill +% + \begin{minipage}[b]{.7\textwidth}\raggedright + \rule{1em}{0pt}% + \dimen2=\textwidth\advance\dimen2-1em + \parbox{\dimen2}{\CoverArt@font + {\Huge\DANTE}\\ + Deutschsprachige\\ + Anwendervereinigung + \TeX\ \eV}\\[1ex] + \dimen3=\textwidth\advance\dimen3-\CoverArt@gap + \hfill\rule{\dimen3}{\CoverArt@linewidth}% + \\[-\baselineskip]\null\hspace{1em}% + {\CoverArt@small\cover@sub{#1}{#2}{#3}}% + \\[-\baselineskip]\rule{0pt}{.617647\textheight}% + \CoverNumberFont + \null\hfill + \makebox(0,0)[br]{% + \textcolor{CoverArt@grey}{% + \CoverArt@strip@no #1;\hspace{1pt}% + }}% Warum verwendet `\CoverArt@strip@no' \CoverTitleFont? RN + \end{minipage}% +} + +%\PassOptionsToPackage{ngerman}{babel} +\RequirePackage{babel} +\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"`}{\frqq}% +\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"'}{\flqq}% +%\def@dqmacro{`}{\frqq}{\frqq} +%\def@dqmacro{'}{\flqq}{\flqq} + + +\RequirePackage{showexpl} +\lstset{language=[LaTeX]TeX} +\providecommand\lstverb{% + \leavevmode\bgroup % + \def\lst@boxpos{b}% + \lsthk@PreSet\lstset{flexiblecolumns,basicstyle=\mdseries\ttfamily\normalsize,backgroundcolor={}, + breaklines=false,keywordstyle=\mdseries\ttfamily\normalsize}% + \lsthk@TextStyle + \@ifnextchar\bgroup{\afterassignment\lst@InlineG \let\@let@token}% + \lstinline@} +\providecommand*{\ctanurl}[1]{\url{CTAN: #1}} + + +\endinput + + +%% +%% End of file `dtk05.clo'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk95.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk95.clo new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..36c32a1afa2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk95.clo @@ -0,0 +1,182 @@ +%% +%% This is file `dtk95.clo', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% dtk.dtx (with options: `1995') +%% +%% IMPORTANT NOTICE: +%% +%% For the copyright see the source file. +%% +%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed +%% with new filenames distinct from dtk95.clo. +%% +%% For distribution of the original source see the terms +%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx. +%% +%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the +%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the +%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be +%% in the same archive or directory.) +%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv" +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $ +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% Purpose: +%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. +%% +%% Documentation: +%% The documentation can be generated from the original file +%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to +%% get the full documentation in DVI format. +%% +%% +%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer +%% Mainzer Str. 8 +%% 56321 Rhens (Germany) +%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer +%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige +%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V. +%% +%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts +%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for +%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless +%% he says so in writing. +%% +%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute +%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any +%% modifications are indicated. +%% +%% +%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with +%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality. +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\RequirePackage[OT1]{fontenc} +\textheight = 484pt +\textwidth = 342pt +\headheight = 14pt +\headsep = 12pt +\footskip = 21pt +\columnsep = 10pt +\emergencystretch = 0pt +\renewcommand\DTKgerman{ + \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman + \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman + \selectlanguage{german}% +} +\ifDTK@german@ + \DTKgerman +\fi +\renewcommand\ChapterFont{\Large\bf} +\renewcommand\SectionFont{\normalsize\bf} +\renewcommand\SubsectionFont{\normalsize\it} +\renewcommand\SubsubsectionFont{\normalsize\it} +\renewcommand\AuthorFont{\normalsize\rm} +\renewcommand\TitleFont{\large\bf} +\renewcommand\HeadFont{\sl} +\renewcommand\FootFont{\footnotesize\sl} +\renewcommand\PagenoFont{\rm} +\renewcommand\HeadRuleDepth{0.1pt} +\renewcommand\FootRuleDepth{0.1pt} +\renewcommand\labelitemi{$\m@th\bullet$} +\renewcommand\labelitemii{\bf --} +\renewcommand\labelitemiii{$\m@th\ast$} +\setlength\leftmargini{2.5em} +\setlength\leftmarginii{2.2em} +\setlength\leftmarginiii{1.87em} +\setlength\leftmarginiv{1.7em} +\renewcommand\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep \bf #1} +\renewenvironment{quotation}{% + \list{}{\listparindent 1.5em + \itemindent\listparindent + \rightmargin\leftmargin\parsep \z@ plus\p@}% + \item\relax +}{\endlist} +\renewcommand\TopArt[2]{% + \begingroup + \unitlength = 1pt + \@tempcnta = \textwidth + \divide\@tempcnta by \unitlength + \framebox(\@tempcnta,38){\parbox{.95\textwidth}{% + \begin{center}{\large\bf #1}#2 \end{center}}} + \endgroup} +\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{% + -1ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\SectionFont}} +\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{% + -1ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsectionFont}} +\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{% + -1ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} +\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{% + 1ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} +\renewcommand\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{4}% + {\parindent}{1ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} +\renewcommand\DTKtitle@skip{0pt} +\renewcommand\DTKtitle@sep{\rule{\textwidth}{.4pt}% + \vskip 14pt plus 8pt minus 12pt} +\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\noindent + \hbox to 1.8em{\hss$\m@th^{\@thefnmark}$}#1} +\renewcommand\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@ + \hrule width .4\columnwidth + \kern 2.6\p@} +\renewcommand\CoverArt[3]{ + \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined + \newfont\CoverTitleFont{cmr17 scaled \magstep 5}% + \fi + \begin{center} + {\LARGE DANTE\\[14pt] + \Large Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX\ \eV}% + \\\rule{\textwidth}{2pt}\par\vfill + \CoverTitleFont Die + \\[22pt] \TeX nische + \\[22pt] Kom{\"o}die + \par\vfill\rule{\textwidth}{2pt}\\[4pt]\large + Heft #1\hfill #2.\ Jahrgang\hfill #3 + \normalsize + \end{center}\vspace*{28.5pt}} +\let\addresssize\relax +\ifDTK@Author@\else + \renewcommand\ContentsArt{\part@nosubtitle{\contentsname}} +\fi +\renewcommand\l@part[2]{% + \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}% + \addvspace{0.5em plus 0pt}% space above part line + \@tempdima 1.5em + \begingroup + \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth + \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth + \bf + \leavevmode + \advance\leftskip\@tempdima + \hskip -\leftskip + #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par + \penalty\@highpenalty + \endgroup} +\renewcommand\l@chapter{\@dottedtocline{0}{1.5em}{2.3em}} + \renewcommand\eV{e.\kern-.18emV\kern-.18em\@ifnextchar.{}{.}} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `dtk95.clo'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk96.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk96.clo new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3c8f1429ef9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk96.clo @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ +%% +%% This is file `dtk96.clo', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% dtk.dtx (with options: `1996') +%% +%% IMPORTANT NOTICE: +%% +%% For the copyright see the source file. +%% +%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed +%% with new filenames distinct from dtk96.clo. +%% +%% For distribution of the original source see the terms +%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx. +%% +%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the +%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the +%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be +%% in the same archive or directory.) +%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv" +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $ +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% Purpose: +%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. +%% +%% Documentation: +%% The documentation can be generated from the original file +%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to +%% get the full documentation in DVI format. +%% +%% +%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer +%% Mainzer Str. 8 +%% 56321 Rhens (Germany) +%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer +%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige +%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V. +%% +%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts +%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for +%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless +%% he says so in writing. +%% +%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute +%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any +%% modifications are indicated. +%% +%% +%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with +%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality. +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\RequirePackage[OT1]{fontenc} +\textheight = 484pt +\textwidth = 342pt +\columnsep = 10pt +\emergencystretch = 0pt +\renewcommand\DTKgerman{ + \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman + \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman + \selectlanguage{german}% +} +\ifDTK@german@ + \DTKgerman +\fi +\let\addresssize\relax +\renewcommand\l@part[2]{% + \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}% + \addvspace{0.5em plus 0pt}% space above part line + \@tempdima 1.5em + \begingroup + \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth + \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth + \bf + \leavevmode + \advance\leftskip\@tempdima + \hskip -\leftskip + #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par + \penalty\@highpenalty + \endgroup} +\renewcommand\l@chapter{\@dottedtocline{0}{1.5em}{2.3em}} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `dtk96.clo'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk97.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk97.clo new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..439e5a7c80a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk97.clo @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +%% +%% This is file `dtk97.clo', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% dtk.dtx (with options: `1997') +%% +%% IMPORTANT NOTICE: +%% +%% For the copyright see the source file. +%% +%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed +%% with new filenames distinct from dtk97.clo. +%% +%% For distribution of the original source see the terms +%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx. +%% +%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the +%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the +%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be +%% in the same archive or directory.) +%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv" +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $ +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% Purpose: +%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. +%% +%% Documentation: +%% The documentation can be generated from the original file +%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to +%% get the full documentation in DVI format. +%% +%% +%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer +%% Mainzer Str. 8 +%% 56321 Rhens (Germany) +%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer +%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige +%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V. +%% +%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts +%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for +%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless +%% he says so in writing. +%% +%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute +%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any +%% modifications are indicated. +%% +%% +%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with +%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality. +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\RequirePackage[OT1]{fontenc} +\textheight = 484pt +\textwidth = 342pt +\columnsep = 10pt +\emergencystretch = 0pt +\renewcommand\DTKgerman{ + \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman + \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman + \selectlanguage{german}% +} +\ifDTK@german@ + \DTKgerman +\fi +\def\TOC@configure{\renewcommand{\bfdefault}{bdx}} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `dtk97.clo'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk98.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk98.clo new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..63199c36ba3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk98.clo @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ +%% +%% This is file `dtk98.clo', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% dtk.dtx (with options: `1998') +%% +%% IMPORTANT NOTICE: +%% +%% For the copyright see the source file. +%% +%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed +%% with new filenames distinct from dtk98.clo. +%% +%% For distribution of the original source see the terms +%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx. +%% +%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the +%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the +%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be +%% in the same archive or directory.) +%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv" +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $ +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% Purpose: +%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. +%% +%% Documentation: +%% The documentation can be generated from the original file +%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to +%% get the full documentation in DVI format. +%% +%% +%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer +%% Mainzer Str. 8 +%% 56321 Rhens (Germany) +%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer +%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige +%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V. +%% +%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts +%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for +%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless +%% he says so in writing. +%% +%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute +%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any +%% modifications are indicated. +%% +%% +%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with +%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality. +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\RequirePackage[OT1]{fontenc} +\textheight = 484pt +\textwidth = 342pt +\columnsep = 10pt +\emergencystretch = 0pt +\renewcommand\DTKgerman{ + \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman + \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman + \selectlanguage{german}% +} +\ifDTK@german@ + \DTKgerman +\fi +\def\TOC@configure{\renewcommand{\bfdefault}{bdx}} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `dtk98.clo'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk99.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk99.clo new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7b4eea7e952 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/dtk99.clo @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +%% +%% This is file `dtk99.clo', +%% generated with the docstrip utility. +%% +%% The original source files were: +%% +%% dtk.dtx (with options: `1999') +%% +%% IMPORTANT NOTICE: +%% +%% For the copyright see the source file. +%% +%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed +%% with new filenames distinct from dtk99.clo. +%% +%% For distribution of the original source see the terms +%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx. +%% +%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the +%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the +%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be +%% in the same archive or directory.) +%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv" +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $ +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% Purpose: +%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. +%% +%% Documentation: +%% The documentation can be generated from the original file +%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to +%% get the full documentation in DVI format. +%% +%% +%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer +%% Mainzer Str. 8 +%% 56321 Rhens (Germany) +%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de +%% +%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer +%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige +%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V. +%% +%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but +%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts +%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for +%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless +%% he says so in writing. +%% +%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute +%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any +%% modifications are indicated. +%% +%% +%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with +%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality. +%% +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +%% \CharacterTable +%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z +%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z +%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 +%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# +%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& +%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) +%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, +%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ +%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< +%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? +%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ +%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ +%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| +%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} +%% +%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\textheight = 484pt +\textwidth = 342pt +\columnsep = 10pt +\emergencystretch = 0pt +\renewcommand\DTKgerman{ + \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman + \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman + \selectlanguage{german}% +} +\ifDTK@german@ + \DTKgerman +\fi +\def\TOC@configure{\renewcommand{\bfdefault}{bdx}} +\endinput +%% +%% End of file `dtk99.clo'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/textlist.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/textlist.sty new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5417fa577b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/historical/textlist.sty @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +% Unbekannter Style/Paket ``textlist'' +% nachgebaut analog zu ``deflist.sty'' +% (br, 12.02.2001) +\newenvironment{textlist}[1]{% + \list{}{% + \settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}% + \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}% + \def\makelabel##1{##1\hfill}% + }% +}{% + \endlist +} +\endinput
\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/Makefile b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/Makefile new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4380c879502 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/Makefile @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + +# Rolf Niepraschk, 2005/02/20, Rolf.Niepraschk@ptb.de +# +# `Makefile' für "Die TeXnische Komödie", Heft 2/2005 + +MAIN = komoedie + +ARCHNAME = $(MAIN)-03-09-$(shell date +%y%m%d) + +LATEX = pdflatex +#LATEX = xelatex + +MAKEINDEXSTYLE = dtk-idx.ist +MAKEGLOSSARYSTYLE = dtk-adr.ist + +ifeq ($(MAKECMDGOALS),corr) + DOCUMENTOPT = '\\PassOptionsToClass{draft}{dtk}' +endif + +# Alle kompletten Artikel mit Literaturverzeichnis +# (Namen der Hauptdateien mit \documentclass usw.). +ARTICLES_BIB = ziegenhagen.ltx + +# Alle anderen kompletten Artikel +# (Namen der Hauptdateien mit \documentclass usw.). +ARTICLES = eqExam.ltx esslingen.tex Hyper.tex GaPBer2.tex willand.tex roemer.tex kiel.tex grob.tex mv41-lang.tex + +# Alle verwendeten bib-Dateien +BIBS = ziegenhagen.bib + + +# Enthält das Dokument inline-PS-Code (als Parameter von +# \PSforPDF-Anweisungen; z.B. PSTricks, psfrag, EPS-Grafiken,...), +# so ist hier "1" anzugeben. +INLINE_PS = 0 + +# Alle sonstigen Dateien, die in das Hauptdokument eingefügt werden. +OTHER_INPUTS = impressum.tex termine.tex adressen.tex + +ifneq ($(ARTICLES_BIB),) + BBLS = $(foreach i,$(basename $(ARTICLES_BIB)),$(addprefix $i, .bbl)) +endif + +ifeq ($(INLINE_PS),1) + PDF_CONTAINER = $(MAIN)-pics.pdf +endif + +ALL_INPUTS = $(ARTICLES_BIB) $(ARTICLES) $(OTHER_INPUTS) + +ALL_ARTICLES = $(foreach i,$(basename $(ARTICLES_BIB)),$(addprefix $i, .pdf)) \ + $(foreach i,$(basename $(ARTICLES)),$(addprefix $i, .pdf)) + +ARCHFILES = $(MAIN).tex $(ALL_INPUTS) $(BIBS) Makefile Makefile.in \ + dtk.dtx dtk.ins + + +all : rm-old ruecken.pdf $(MAIN).pdf + +corr : $(MAIN).pdf + +rm-old : + $(RM) ruecken.pdf $(MAIN).pdf + +articles : $(MAIN).inf $(ALL_ARTICLES) $(BBLS) + +$(MAIN).inf : $(MAIN).pdf + +$(MAIN).pdf : $(MAIN).tex $(ALL_INPUTS) $(BBLS) $(PDF_CONTAINER) + +$(MAIN).dvi : #$(MAIN).tex $(ALL_INPUTS) + export TEXMFHOME=./texmf + latex $(MAIN).tex + +$(MAIN)-pics.ps : $(MAIN).dvi + dvips -Ppdf -o $@ $< + +$(MAIN)-pics.pdf : $(MAIN)-pics.ps + GS_OPTIONS=-dPDFSETTINGS=/prepress ps2pdf $< $@ + +%.bbl : %.aux $(BIBS) + bibtex $< + +%.aux : %.ltx + $(LATEX) $< + $(RM) $(basename $@).pdf + +%.aux : %.tex + $(LATEX) $< + $(RM) $(basename $@).pdf + +xxx : + @echo $(basename $(ARTICLES_BIB)) + @echo + @echo $(foreach i,$(basename $(ARTICLES_BIB)),$(addprefix $i, .bbl)) + @echo + @echo $(OTHER_INPUTS) + +ruecken.pdf : ruecken.tex + $(LATEX) ruecken.tex + +ruecken.tex : $(MAIN).tex + @perl -n -e 'print "\ + \\documentclass[11pt,a4paper]{article} \n\ + \\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} \n\ + \\usepackage{lmodern} \n\ + \\oddsidemargin=-1in \n\ + \\unitlength=1mm \n\ + \\begin{document} \n\ + \\begin{picture}(210,4) \n\ + \\put(5,2){\\makebox(100,0)[l]{\\tiny Die \\TeX nische Kom\\\"odie $$1}}\n\ + \\put(0,0){\\line(-1,0){5}} \n\ + \\put(0,0){\\line(0,-1){5}} \n\ + \\put(0,4){\\line(-1,0){5}} \n\ + \\put(0,4){\\line(0,1){5}} \n\ + \\end{picture} \n\ + \\end{document} \n\ + " if m/DieTeXnischeKomoedie\{(.*)\}\{(.*)\}\{(.*)\}/' $(MAIN).tex > ruecken.tex + +clean : _clean + $(RM) $(addprefix $(MAIN), .inf) + $(RM) $(foreach i,$(basename $(ARTICLES_BIB)),$(addprefix $i, \ + .pdf .log .aux .bbl .blg .ind .ilg .gls .glg)) \ + $(addprefix ruecken, .tex .log .aux) \ + $(MAIN)-pics.pdf + +veryclean : clean + $(RM) $(MAIN).pdf ruecken.pdf $(ALL_ARTICLES) + +arch : + zip $(ARCHNAME).zip $(ARCHFILES) + +.PHONY : all corr arch clean veryclean +# nur noetig, wenn Dateien mit dem selben Namen existieren + +.INTERMEDIATE : $(MAIN).dvi $(MAIN)-pics.ps + +ifneq ($(MAKECMDGOALS),arch) + include Makefile.in +endif + + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/Makefile.in b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e7f1be72b3d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + +# Makefile.latex -- Rules for processing LaTeX files with "make" +# +# Copyright (C) 1999,2005 Rolf Niepraschk, Rolf.Niepraschk@ptb.de, 2005/01/20 + +.SUFFIXES : .tex .dvi .ps .pdf .eps .mp .mps + +SHELL = /bin/sh + +ifeq ($(BIBTEX),) + BIBTEX= bibtex +endif +ifeq ($(METAPOST),) + METAPOST = mpost +endif +ifeq ($(MAKEINDEX),) + MAKEINDEX = makeindex +endif +ifeq ($(MAKEGLOSSARY),) + MAKEGLOSSARY = makeindex +endif +ifeq ($(GREP),) + GREP = grep +endif +ifeq ($(DIFF),) + DIFF = diff +endif +ifeq ($(TOUCH),) + TOUCH = touch +endif +ifeq ($(CP),) + CP = cp +endif + +ifneq ($(MAKEINDEXSTYLE),) + idxstyle = -s $(MAKEINDEXSTYLE) +endif +ifneq ($(MAKEGLOSSARYSTYLE),) + glostyle = -s $(MAKEGLOSSARYSTYLE) +endif + +ifeq ($(RUNMAX),) + runmax = 5 +else + runmax = $(RUNMAX) +endif + +bibwarn = 'There were undefined references' +rerunwarn = 'Rerun to get cross-references right' +linenowarn = 'rerun to get it right' +# Package longtable Warning: Table widths have changed. Rerun LaTeX. +multlab = 'There were multiply-defined labels' +ltxmisc = $*.toc $*.lof $*.lot $*.idx $*.glo #$*.out + +%.dvi %.pdf : %.ltx + @ $(latexcmds) + +%.dvi %.pdf : %.tex + @ $(latexcmds) + +define latexcmds + $(TOUCH) $(ltxmisc) # create some files if necessary + runs=0; \ + while test $$runs -lt $(runmax); do \ + runs=`expr $$runs + 1`; rerun=0; status=0; \ + $(foreach i, $(ltxmisc), $(CP) $i $i.old;) \ + $(LATEX) '$(DOCUMENTOPT)\input{$<}'; \ + if test $$? -gt 0; then status=`expr $$status + 64`; fi; \ + if $(GREP) $(rerunwarn) $*.log > /dev/null; then rerun=1; fi; \ + if $(GREP) $(linenowarn) $*.log > /dev/null; then rerun=1; fi; \ + if $(DIFF) $*.idx $*.idx.old > /dev/null; then :; else \ + $(MAKEINDEX) $(MAKEINDEXFLAGS) $(idxstyle) \ + -t $*.ilg -o $*.ind $*.idx; \ + if test $$? -gt 0; then status=`expr $$status + 256`; break; fi; \ + fi; \ + if $(DIFF) $*.glo $*.glo.old > /dev/null; then :; else \ + $(MAKEGLOSSARY) $(MAKEGLOSSARYFLAGS) $(glostyle) \ + -t $*.glg -o $*.gls $*.glo; \ + if test $$? -gt 0; then status=`expr $$status + 512`; break; fi; \ + fi; \ + $(foreach i, $(ltxmisc), \ + if $(DIFF) $i $i.old > /dev/null; then :; else rerun=1; fi;) \ + echo '++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++' rerun=$$rerun runs=$$runs; \ + if test $$rerun -eq 0; then break; fi; \ + done; \ + $(RM) $(ltxmisc:=.old); \ + for i in $(ltxmisc); do if test ! -s $$i; then $(RM) $$i; fi; done; \ + exit $$status +endef + +_clean : + $(RM) $(addprefix $(MAIN), .log .aux .bbl .blg .ind .ilg .gls .glg \ + $(ltxmisc)) diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/adressen.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/adressen.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..4fd9d8a2194 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/adressen.tex @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +\begingroup\small +\Dante{}\\\Label{adressen}% +%Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX~\eV\\ +Postfach 10\,18\,40\\ +69008 Heidelberg + +\smallskip +\begin{tabular*}{\textwidth}{@{}llr@{}} +Tel.: & 0\,62\,21/2\,97\,66 (Mo., Mi.--Fr., 10.00--12.00\,Uhr)\\ +Fax: & 0\,62\,21/16\,79\,06\\ +E-Mail: & \texttt{dante@dante.de}\\[6pt] +Konto: & VR Bank Rhein-Neckar eG\\ + & BLZ 670\,900\,00\\ + & Kontonummer 2\,310\,007\\ + & \texttt{IBAN DE67\,6709\,0000\,0002\,3100\,07}\\ + & \texttt{SWIFT-BIC GENODE61MA2}\\[4pt] +% & \multicolumn{2}{l@{}}{Postbank Karlsruhe \hfill +% (Auslands"uberweisungen)}\\ +% & BLZ 660\,100\,75\\ +% & Kontonummer 213\,400\,757\\ +% & \texttt{IBAN DE93\,6601\,0075\,0213\,4007\,57} \\ +% & \texttt{SWIFT-BIC PBNKDEFF}\\[9pt] +%Beitr"age: +% & Studenten & 30,-- \euro\\ +% & Vollmitglieder & 45,-- \euro\\ +% & Institutionelle Mitglieder & 65,-- \euro\\ +% & Firmen, die \TeX{} anwenden & 150,-- \euro\\ +% & Firmen, die \TeX{} verkaufen & 250,-- \euro\\[2pt] +% & Nachlass f\"ur aktive Mitglieder & 10,-- \euro +\end{tabular*} + +\section{Pr"asidium}\Label{vorstand} + +\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\quad}l@{\quad}l@{}} + Pr"asident: & Klaus H"oppner\Label{president} + & {\small\texttt{president@dante.de}}\\ + Vizepr"asident: & Volker RW Schaa\Label{vice-president} + & {\small\texttt{vice-president@dante.de}}\\ + Schatzmeister: & Tobias Sterzl\Label{treasurer} + & {\small\texttt{treasurer@dante.de}}\\ + Schriftf"uhrer: & Manfred Lotz\Label{secretary} + & {\small\texttt{secretary@dante.de}}\\ + Beisitzer: & G"unter Partosch\Label{beisitzer:gp} + %& {\small\texttt{advisor@dante.de}} + \\ + & Bernd Raichle\Label{beisitzer:br}\\ + & Herbert Vo\ss\Label{beisitzer:hv} +\end{tabular} + +\section{Server} + +{\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.1} +\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\quad}l} +\textsc{CTAN}: & \url{http://mirror.ctan.org} \iffalse \quad [\texttt{80.237.210.73}] \fi \\ +\textsc{DANTE}: & \url{http://www.dante.de/}\\ +\end{tabular}} + +\iffalse +\section{Mailing-Listen} + +{\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{1.1} +\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\quad}l} +Deutschsprache \TeX-Nutzer: & \url{tex-d-l@listserv.gmd.de}\\ +Der Verein \dante{} & \url{dante-ev@urz.uni-heidelberg.de} +\end{tabular}} +\fi + +\par\endgroup % zurueckschalten auf \normalsize + +\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/editorial.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/editorial.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..196a7b1f55b --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/editorial.tex @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +\address{Herbert}{Vo\ss}{Wasgenstra\ss e 21\\ + 14129 Berlin\\ + \protect\url{herbert@dante.de}} +%\address{Herbert}{Vo\ss}{Wasgenstraße 21\\14129 Berlin\\\protect\url{herbert@dante.de}} + +Liebe Leserinnen und Leser, + +Wunder geschehen ja eigentlich nicht in regelmäßigen Abständen, jedenfalls wären es dann definitionsgemäß +keine mehr. So bleibt das Problem, wie man es bezeichnen soll, was Sie in den Händen halten. Dass bekanntermaßen nach einer Ausgabe +der Zeitschrift "`\DTK"' +natürlich immer auch vor einer Ausgabe ist, wird keinen erstaunen. Wenn aber nach einer Ausgabe der +"`Eingabespeicher"' der eingereichten Manuskripte immer vollständig geleert ist, so bleibt es ein Wunder, +dass bis zur nächsten Ausgabe dieser "`Speicher"' so aufgefüllt wird, dass es wieder für eine +neue Ausgabe in gewohntem Umfang reicht. Der Dank gebührt natürlich den Autoren, denn ohne sie könnte es tatsächlich zu einem echten +Wunder werden \ldots + +Dass \TeX, als reines Textsatzsystem konzipiert, durch derartig viele verschiedene Pakete +zur Grafikausgabe unterstützt wird, ist ebenfalls ein kleines Wunder, zumal die +Qualität mit der vom Textsatz gewohnten durchaus konkurrieren kann. In diesem Heft +finden Sie wieder eine Variante beschrieben. Weiterhin lesen Sie den Bericht von +der letzten Herbsttagung in Esslingen und dem Linuxtag in Kiel, auf dem \dante\ erstmalig +vertreten war. Weiterhin finden Sie Texte, die eher den praktischen Bereich von \LaTeX\ +beleuchten und natürlich, wie gewohnt, die Liste der neuen Pakete. Der Umfang dieser Liste ist das letzte Wunder +von dem man berichten kann, denn nach über 30 Jahren \TeX\ und 20 Jahren \LaTeX\ erscheint +die innovative Kraft der \TeX-Gemeinde ungebrochen. + + +\bigskip +Ich wünsche Ihnen wie immer viel Spaß beim Lesen und verbleibe + +%\medskip +%\enlargethispage{1.5ex} +mit \TeX nischen Grüßen, + +Ihr Herbert Voß + +\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/grusswort.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/grusswort.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3ef706dc9f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/grusswort.tex @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +\title{Gru"swort}\Label{gruss} +\address{Volker RW}{Schaa}{siehe Seite~\protect\Pageref{president}} +\address{Klaus}{Höppner}{siehe Seite~\protect\Pageref{vice-president}} +\maketitle + +Liebe Mitglieder, + +dieses Grußwort + +Mit freundlichem Gruß + +\begin{tabular}{@{}ll} +Volker RW Schaa & Klaus Höppner\\ +(Vorsitzender) & (Stellv. Vorsitzender) +\end{tabular} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/impressum.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/impressum.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2d5d0776808 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/impressum.tex @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +\begingroup\small +"`Die \TeX{}nische Komödie"' ist die Mitgliedszeitschrift von +\dante{} Der Bezugspreis ist im Mitgliedsbeitrag enthalten. +Namentlich gekennzeichnete Beiträge geben die Meinung der +Schreibenden wieder. Reproduktion oder Nutzung der erschienenen +Beiträge durch konventionelle, elektronische oder beliebige andere +Verfahren ist nur im nicht-kommerziellen Rahmen gestattet. +Verwendungen in größerem Umfang bitte zur Information bei \dante{} +melden. + +Beiträge sollten in Standard-\LaTeX-Quellcode unter Verwendung der +Dokumentenklasse \texttt{dtk} erstellt und per \mbox{E-Mail} oder +Datenträger (CD) an untenstehende Adresse +der Redaktion geschickt werden. Sind +spezielle Makros, \LaTeX-Pakete oder Schriften dafür nötig, so +m"ussen auch diese komplett mitgeliefert werden. Außerdem m"ussen sie auf +Anfrage Interessierten zugänglich gemacht werden. \smallskip + + +Diese Ausgabe wurde mit +\texttt{pdfTeX 3.1415926-1.40.10-2.2} %\TeX Live2007 +erstellt. +%\texttt{LaTeX2e (2001/06/01)}, +%{\tt GSview\,1.3} (f"ur die Bildschirmdarstellung) +%{\tt ghostview 1.3} (f"ur die Bildschirmdarstellung) +%{\tt dviscr 1.4s} (f"ur die Bildschirmdarstellung), +%{\tt dvipm 1.5a} (f"ur die Bildschirmdarstellung), +%\texttt{Ac"-ro"-bat Read"-er 5.0.8} +% und \texttt{windvi 0.67} +%und +%\texttt{xdvi(k)} \texttt{22.40k} +%f"ur die Bild"-schirm"-dar"-stellung. +%und \texttt{dvips(k)~5.86e} +%(f"ur die endg"ultige Belichtung) +%f"ur Korrektur und Belichtung. +%Die Schriften zur Belichtung wurden mit +%dem \MF-Modus \texttt{linoone} (1270\,dpi) berechnet. +Als Stan"-dard-Schriften kamen die Type-1-Fonts Latin-Modern und LuxiMono zum Einsatz. + +\smallskip +\vfill +\noindent +\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{ }l@{}} + Erscheinungsweise: & viertelj"ahrlich\\ + Erscheinungsort: & Heidelberg\\ + Auf\/lage: & 2700\\ + Herausgeber: & \Dante\\ + & Postfach 10\,18\,40\\ + & 69008 Heidelberg\\[3pt] + & \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}ll@{}} +% Tel.: & 0\,62\,21/2\,97\,66\\ +% Fax: & 0\,62\,21/16\,79\,06\\ + E-Mail: & \texttt{dante@dante.de}\\ + & \texttt{dtkred@dante.de} (Redaktion) + \end{tabular}\\[4pt] + Druck: & Konrad Triltsch Print und digitale Medien GmbH\\ + & Johannes-Gutenberg-Str. 1--3, + 97199 Ochsenfurt-Hohestadt\\[4pt] + Redaktion: & Herbert Vo\ss\ (verantwortlicher Redakteur)\\ + Mitarbeit : & %\raisebox{-\height}{\begin{minipage}{.75\textwidth} +% \begin{multicols}3 \raggedright +% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Luzia Dietsche} %\\ +% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Rudolf Herrmann} %\\ +% Moriz Hoffmann-""Axthelm \\ +% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Klaus H"oppner} % \\ +% Lutz Ihlenburg \\ + \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Gert Ingold} +% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Manfred Lotz} +% Uwe M"unch \\ +% & \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Gerd Neugebauer} %\\ + \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Rolf Niepraschk} +% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{G"unter Partosch} \\ +% & \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Bernd Raichle} %\\ + \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Christine Römer} +% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Volker RW Schaa} %\\ +% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Hilmar Schlegel} +% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Martin Schröder} \\ +% \makebox[0.25\linewidth][l]{Uwe Ziegenhagen} +% \end{multicols} + %\end{minipage}} + +\end{tabular} + +\bigskip + +\noindent +\makebox[\linewidth]{% + Redaktionsschluss für Heft 1/2010: 15. Januar 2010 + \hfill + {ISSN 1434-5897}} + +\par\endgroup +\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/komoedie.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/komoedie.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b73c4a887e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/komoedie.tex @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ +%\pdfpkresolution=1200\relax +%\PassOptionsToPackage{draft}{graphics} +%\PassOptionsToPackage{russian,greek,USenglish,ngerman}{babel} +\PassOptionsToPackage{table,dvipsnames}{xcolor} +%\PassOptionsToPackage{final}{listings} +%\PassOptionsToPackage{X2,OT2,T1}{fontenc} +\listfiles + +\documentclass[%tgschola, +full,fleqn,08,ngerman]{dtk} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} +\usepackage{cmap} +\usepackage{dtklogos,ragged2e,booktabs} +\usepackage{eurosym} +\usepackage[hyphens]{url} +\usepackage{graphicx} +\usepackage{xspace,shortvrb} +\usepackage[bottom]{footmisc} +\usepackage{array,calc} +\usepackage{enumerate,pdfpages} +\usepackage{booktabs} +\usepackage{subfig} +\usepackage{babel} +\usepackage{setspace} +\AtBeginDocument{\selectlanguage{ngerman}} +%\usepackage[protrusion=true,expansion=true]{microtype} +\usepackage{microtype} + +\lstset{literate={ä}{{\"a}}1 {ö}{{\"o}}1 {ü}{{\"u}}1 + {Ä}{{\"A}}1 {Ö}{{\"O}}1 {Ãœ}{{\"U}}1 {ß}{\ss}1,language=[LaTeX]TeX} + +%\usepackage[ragged]{sidecap} +%\usepackage{picins} +%\usepackage{pifont} + +\setlength{\belowcaptionskip}{\abovecaptionskip} +\let\Euro\euro +\let\CTANurl\ctanurl +\def\amsmath{\texttt{amsmath}} +\def\cs#1{\texttt{\textbackslash#1}} +%\renewcommand\floatpagefraction{.8}??? +%^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ +% In `dtk.cls' hinein? RN + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% + +%%% Warum nicht in dtklogos drin? +%%%\newcommand*\CMD[1]{\small\texttt{\textbackslash #1}} +\newcommand*\CTAN{\textsc{CTAN}} +%%%\newcommand*\AMSmath{\texttt{amsmath}}% +% Was ist AMSmath? Ein Logo? RN + +%\urldef{\WinstonChang}\url{http://www.stdout.org/~winston/latex/} +\lstset{basicstyle=\small\ttfamily} + +%\makeindex +%\inputencoding{utf8} +%\selectlanguage{ngerman} +%\shorthandon{"} +\makeaddresses + + +\makeatletter +\makeatother% + + + +\begin{document} + +\DieTeXnischeKomoedie{4/2009}{21}{November 2009} + +\part{Impressum} +\vspace*{-2mm} +\inputencoding{utf8} +\DTKinput{impressum} + +\part{Editorial} +\DTKinput{editorial} +\markboth{}{} + +\clearpage + + +\part[Hinter der B"uhne]{Hinter der B"uhne}[Vereinsinternes] +\bgroup +\inputencoding{latin1} +\DTKinput{gruss-2009-3-m} +\clearpage +\DTKinput{mv41-lang} +%\DTKinput{kassenbericht} +\egroup + +\part{\TeX-Theatertage} +\DTKinput{esslingen} +\bgroup +\inputencoding{latin1} +\DTKinput{kiel} +\egroup + + +\part{Bretter, die die Welt bedeuten} + +\DTKinput{eqExam} + +\bgroup +\inputencoding{latin9} +\DTKinput{ziegenhagen} +\DTKinput{GaPBer2} +\DTKinput{Hyper} +\DTKinput{willand} +\DTKinput{grob} +\egroup + +\clearpage + +%\part{Tipps und Tricks} + +%\DTKinput{niepraschk0} +\clearpage + +\part{Von fremden Bühnen} +\vspace*{-4ex} +\bgroup +\inputencoding{latin1} +\DTKinput{neuepakete} +\egroup + + +\part{Bücher und Rezensionen} + +\DTKinput{roemer} + +%\part{Leserbriefe} + +\clearpage +\part{Spielplan} + +\DTKinput{termine} +\clearpage + +\DTKinput{stammtische} + +\part{Adressen} + +\DTKinput{adressen} + +\clearpage +\markboth{}{} +\listofaddresses +\begingroup +%\raggedright% +\tableofcontents +\endgroup +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/ruecken.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/ruecken.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a6130ee72a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/ruecken.tex @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ + +\documentclass[11pt,a4paper]{article} + +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} + +\usepackage{lmodern} + +\oddsidemargin=-1in + +\unitlength=1mm + +\begin{document} + +\begin{picture}(210,4) + + \put(5,2){\makebox(100,0)[l]{\tiny Die \TeX nische Kom\"odie 4/2009}} + + \put(0,0){\line(-1,0){5}} + + \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){5}} + + \put(0,4){\line(-1,0){5}} + + \put(0,4){\line(0,1){5}} + +\end{picture} + +\end{document} + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/rueckenNeu.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/rueckenNeu.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..78c7c804f9e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/rueckenNeu.tex @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +\documentclass[11pt,a4paper,landscape]{article} +\pagestyle{empty} +\usepackage{xcolor,geometry} +\oddsidemargin=-1in + +\unitlength=1mm + +\begin{document} + +\begin{picture}(210,4) + + \put(0,1.2){\colorbox{black!10}{\makebox[700pt][l]{\rule[-2ex]{0pt}{5ex}\kern5mm\tiny + Die \TeX nische Kom\"odie 1/2009\hfill~}}} + + \put(0,0){\line(-1,0){5}} + \put(210,0){\line(1,0){5}} + + \put(0,0){\line(0,-1){5}} + \put(210,0){\line(0,-1){5}} + + \put(0,4){\line(-1,0){5}} + \put(210,4){\line(1,0){5}} + + \put(0,4){\line(0,1){5}} + \put(210,4){\line(0,1){5}} +\end{picture} + +\end{document} + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/stammtische.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/stammtische.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9a41719e9c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/stammtische.tex @@ -0,0 +1,281 @@ +\chapter{Stammtische}\Label{stammt} +\markboth{}{} +\bgroup\small +\emph{In verschiedenen Städten im Einzugsbereich von \dante{} finden + regelmäßig Treffen von \TeX-Anwendern statt, die für jeden offen + sind. Im WWW gibt es aktuelle Informationen unter + \Path{http://www.dante.de/index/Stammtische.html}. +} +\vspace*{2pt} +%\vspace*{8pt} + +\begin{multicols}{2}\small\raggedright\raggedcolumns + \renewcommand\rolllabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep\bf #1\hfill} + \begin{roll}\footnotesize + \setlength{\itemsep}{-.5ex} + \item[Aachen] \ \\ + Torsten Bronger\\ \url{bronger@physik.rwth-aachen.de}\\ + \emph{Gaststätte Knossos, Templergraben 28\\ + Zweiter Donnerstag im Monat, 19.00\,Uhr} + + \item[Berlin] \ \\ + Rolf Niepraschk\\ % mnr 569 +% Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt\\ +% Abbestr. 2--12\\ + Tel.: 0\,30/3\,48\,13\,16\\ + \url{Rolf.Niepraschk@gmx.de}\\ +% \emph{Gasthaus Pali-Eck \\ Koppenstr. 41\\ + \emph{Gaststätte Bärenschenke\\ + Friedrichstraße 124\\ + 10117 Berlin Mitte\\ + Zweiter Donnerstag im Monat, + 19.00\,Uhr} +% + \item[Bremen] \ \\ + Winfried Neugebauer\\ + Tel.: 04\,21-8\,28\,65\,14\\ + \url{tex@wphn.de}\\ + \emph{Wechselnder Ort\\ + Erster Donnerstag im Monat, + 18.30\,Uhr} +% +% \item[Chemnitz] \ \\ +% Ralf König\\ +% Tel.: 03\,41/4\,11\,58\,00\\ +% \verb|ralf.koenig@s1998.tu-chemnitz.de|\\ +% \emph{Studenten-Klub "`bspw"'\\ Vettersstra� 70/72, 2.OG\\ +% Dritter Mittwoch im Monat, 18.00\,Uhr} +% + \item[Darmstadt] \ \\ + Karlheinz Geyer\\ + \url{geyerk.fv.tu@nds.tu-darmstadt.de}\\ + \emph{Hostaria Toskana\\ + Nieder-Ramstädter-Straße 13\\ + 64283 Darmstadt\\ + \url{http://www.da-tex.org}\\ + Erster Freitag im Monat, ab 19.30\,Uhr} +% + \item[Dortmund] \ \\ + Martin Schr\"oder\\ + \url{martin@oneiros.de}\\ + Tel.: 0231-1206574\\ + \emph{Wechselnder Ort\\ + Zweiter Mittwoch im Monat, 18.30\,Uhr} +% + \item[Dresden] \ \\ + Carsten Vogel\\ + \url{lego@wh10.tu-dresden.de}\\ + \emph{Studentenwohnheim, + Borsbergstraße 34, Dresden, Ortsteil Striesen\\ + ca. alle 8 Wochen, Mittwoch, 19.00\,Uhr} +% \columnbreak\columnbreak\columnbreak + + \item[Düsseldorf] \ \\ + Georg Verweyen\\ + \url{Georg.Verweyen@web.de}\\ + \emph{Bistro/Café Zicke\\ + Böckerstr. 5\,a (Ecke Bergerallee)\\ + 40213 Düsseldorf\\ + Zweiter Mittwoch in ungeraden Monaten, 20.00\,Uhr} +% +%\columnbreak + \item[Erlangen] \ \\ + Walter Schmidt, Peter Seitz\\ + \url{w.a.schmidt@gmx.net}\\% \url{p.seitz@ks-ingenieurconsult.de}\\ +% \url{http://home.vr-web.de/was/stammtisch.html} + \emph{Gaststätte "`Deutsches Haus"'\\ + Luitpoldstraße 25\\ + Dritter Dienstag im Monat, 19.00\,Uhr}% +% + \item[Freiburg] \ \\ + Heiko Oberdiek\\ + Tel.: 07\,61/4\,34\,05\\ + \url{oberdiek@uni-freiburg.de}\\ + \url{http://www.inacker.de/TeX/}\\ + \emph{Wechselnder Ort\\ + Dritter Donnerstag im Monat, 19.30\,Uhr}% +% + \item[Hamburg] \ \\%\raggedright + Lothar Fröhling\\ + \url{lothar@thefroehlings.de}\\ + \emph{Zum Schwarzenberg\\ + Schwarzenbergstr. 80 -- 21073 Hamburg\\ + Letzter Dienstag im Monat, 19.30\,Uhr}% +% \vspace*{0pt}% +% + \item[Hannover] \ \\ + Mark Heisterkamp\\ +% Seminarraum RRZN, Regionales Rechenzentrum f"ur Niedersachsen, +% Schloßwender Str. 5\\ +% Tel.: 05\,11/7\,62\,51\,34\\ + \url{heisterkamp@rrzn.uni-hannover.de}\\ + \emph{Seminarraum RRZN\\ + Schlo"swender Straße 5\\ + Zweiter Donnerstag im Monat, + 18.30\,Uhr} +% + \item[Heidelberg] \ \\ + Martin Wilhelm Leidig\\ + Tel.: 06203/402203 \\ + \url{moss@moss.in-berlin.de}\\ + Anmeldeseite zur Mailingliste: \\[1pt] + \parbox{\columnwidth}{% + \url{http://mailman.moss.in-berlin.de/mailman/listinfo/stammtisch-hd-moss.in-berlin.de}}\\[1pt] + \emph{"`Goldener Hirsch"'\\ + Hauptstr. 18, 68526 Ladenburg\\ + Letzter Freitag im Monat, ab 19.30 Uhr} +% + \item[Karlsruhe] \ \\ + Klaus Braune\\ + Tel.: 07\,21/6\,08\,40\,31\\ + \url{braune@rz.uni-karlsruhe.de}\\ + \emph{Universit"at Karlsruhe, Rechenzentrum\\ + Zirkel 2, 3.\,OG, Raum 316\\ + Erster Donnerstag im Monat, + 19.30\,Uhr} +%\columnbreak\columnbreak\columnbreak + +\iffalse + \item[Kiel] \ \\ + Karsten Heymann\\ + \url{karsten.heymann@gmx.de}\\ + \emph{Letzter Donnerstag im Monat, 19.00\, Uhr\\ + Ort siehe \url{http://zaubberer.net/latexwiki}} +\fi + \item[Köln] \ \\ + Helmut Siegert\\ +% \url{b.hopp@lepkes-frings.de}\\ + \emph{Institut f"ur Kristallographie\\ + Zülpicher Straße 49b\\ + Letzter Dienstag im Monat, + 19.30\,Uhr} +% 50674 Köln +% \columnbreak\columnbreak\columnbreak +% \item[Konstanz] \ \\ +% Matthias Weisgerber, Hraban Ramm \\ +% \verb|weisgerb@fmi.uni-konstanz.de|, \verb|hraban@fiee.net|\\ +% \emph{Restaurant Rheingold\\ +% Spanierstra� 3\\ +% unregelm�ig} +% + \item[München] \ \\ + Uwe Siart\\ + \url{uwe.siart@tum.de}\\ + \url{http://www.siart.de/typografie/stammtisch.xhtml}\\ + \emph{Gaststätte "`Marktwirt"'\\ + Heiliggeiststr.\,2 \\ + Erste Woche des Monats an wechselnden Tagen, 19.00\,Uhr} +% +% +% \item[Münster] \ \\ +% Johannes Reese\\ +% \url{reese@linguist.de}\\ +% \emph{Gaststätte "`Sabroso"'\\ Mauritzstraße 19\\ +% nach Vereinbarung} +% +% \item[Oldenburg] \ \\ +% Konrad Blum\\ +% \verb+konrad@blum.physik.uni-oldenburg.de+\\ +% \emph{Bistro "`DaCapo"'\\ +% Friedhofsweg 64 \\%26121 Oldenburg +% Zweiter Montag im Monat, 20.00\,Uhr} +% +% \columnbreak\columnbreak\columnbreak + \item[Stuttgart] \ \\\nopagebreak + Bernd Raichle\\ + \url{bernd.raichle@gmx.de}\\ + \emph{Bar e Ristorante "`Valle"'\\ + Geschwister-Scholl-Str. 3\\ + Zweiter Dienstag im Monat, 19.30\,Uhr} + + \item[Trier] \ \\ + Martin Sievers\\ + \url{stammtisch-trier@texberatung.de}\\ + \emph{Fetzenkneipe (Haus Fetzenreich)\\ + Sichelstraße 36 (beim Sieh-Um-Dich)\\ +% 54290 Trier\\ + Dritter Montag des Monats, 20.15\,Uhr} + +% +%Ort: Ratskeller Ulm (Rathaus Ulm) 16-3-2009 +%Zeit: jeder dritte Montag im Monat um 19.30 +%Webseite: http://latex.in-ulm.de +%Ansprechpartner: Adelheid Grob, latex@heidi.in-ulm.de + + \item[Ulm] \ \\ + Adelheid Grob\\ + \url{latex@heidi.in-ulm.de}\\ + \url{http://latex.in-ulm.de}\\ + \emph{Ratskeller Ulm (Rathaus Ulm)\\ + Dritter Montag im Monat, 19.30\,Uhr} +% + \item[Wuppertal] \ \\\raggedright + Andreas Schrell\\ % mnr 86 +% Erlenstr. 1\\ + Tel.: 02193/53\,10\,93\\ + \url{as@schrell.de}\\ + \emph{Restaurant Croatia "`Haus Johannisberg"'\\ + Südstraße 10\\ + an der Schwimmoper Wuppertal-Elberfeld\\ + Zweiter Donnerstag im Monat, 19.30\,Uhr}% +% + \item[W\"urzburg] \ \\ + Bastian Hepp\\ + \url{LaTeX@sning.de}\\ + \emph{nach Vereinbarung} +% +% \item[Z\"urich] \ \\ +% Johannes Reese\\ +% \url{reese@spw.unizh.ch}\\ +% \emph{nach Vereinbarung} +% + \end{roll}% +\end{multicols}% +\egroup + +\markboth{Stammtische}{Stammtische} + + +\iffalse +\vfill +\bgroup\fboxsep=10pt +\fbox{\parbox{\linewidth-2\fboxsep-2\fboxrule}{% +\emph{Der Bayerische \TeX-Stammtisch 2009} + +\medskip +Jedes Jahr veranstalten die \TeX-Stammtische aus München, Erlangen und +Ulm ein gemeinsames Sommerfest mit Fachvorträgen und anschließendem Grillabend. + +Das diesjährige Sommerfest findet statt am Samstag, 27.\,Juni 2009 in Ulm. +Beginn: voraussichtlich 14 Uhr; Ende: offen. +% +Weitere Informationen und Kontaktadresse siehe \url{http://latex.in-ulm.de/baytex09/}. + +Gäste von außerhalb Bayerns bzw. Ulms sind herzlich willkommen! }} +\egroup +\fi + +\vfill + +\begin{center} +%\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess8}\hfill% +%\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess0} + +%\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess1}\hfill% +%\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess2} + +\minipage[b]{0.495\textwidth} +\includegraphics[width=0.9\linewidth]{Bilder/ess3} +~\rotatebox{90}{\small(Fotos: Martin Sievers)} +\endminipage\hfill% +\minipage[b]{0.495\textwidth} +\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{Bilder/ess6}\\[2pt] +\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{Bilder/ess5} +\endminipage + +\end{center} + + +\endinput + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/termine.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/termine.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..68c4ef37bf3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/dtk/komoedie/termine.tex @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + +\vspace*{-3mm} + +\chapter{Termine}\label{termine} + +\begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{@{}rX@{}} + +\iffalse +\multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\textbf{2009}} \\[3pt] + +28.\,7. -- 31.\,7. & + \textbf{TUG 2009}\newline + Notre Dame (Indiana), USA\newline + \url{http://tug.org/tug2009/} \\[3pt] + +24.\,8. -- 28.\,8. & + \textbf{Euro\TeX\ 2009 und Con\TeX t meeting}\newline + Den Haag, Niederlande\newline + \url{http://www.ntg.nl/EuroTeX2009/} \\[3pt] + +12.\,9. & + \textbf{Herbsttagung}\newline und 41.\,Mitgliederversammlung von \dante\newline + Hochschule Esslingen\newline + \url{http://www.dante.de/events/mv41.html} \\[3pt] + + +2.\,10. -- 3.\,10. & + \textbf{Kieler Linux- und OpenSource-Tage} \newline + Kieler Innovations- und Technologiezentrum\newline + Schauenburgerstr. 116, 24118 Kiel\\[3pt] + +13.\,10. & + \textbf{GuiT} 2007 meeting\newline + Pisa, Italien\newline + \url{http://www.guit.sssup.it/GuITmeeting/2007/2007.en.php/} \\[3pt] +\fi + + +\multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\textbf{2010}} \\[3pt] +%25.\,2. -- 27.\,2. & +Februar & + \textbf{DANTE\,2010}\newline und 42.\,Mitgliederversammlung von \dante\newline + Universität Dortmund\newline + ~%\url{http://www.dante.de/dante/events/dante2009/} + \\[3pt] + +13.\,3. -- 14.\,3. & + \textbf{Chemnitzer Linuxtage\,2010} \newline + Technische Universität Chemnitz\newline + 09107 Chemnitz\newline + \url{http://www.chemnitzer.linux-tage.de}\\[3pt] + + +\iffalse +20.\,8. -- 25.\,8. & + \textbf{2nd Con\TeX t user meeting}\newline + Bohinj, Slovenia\newline + \url{http://meeting.contextgarden.net/2008/}\\[3pt] + +13.\,10. & + \textbf{GuiT} 2008 meeting\newline + Pisa, Italien\newline + \url{http://www.guit.sssup.it/GuITmeeting/2008/2008.en.php/} \\[3pt] +\fi +%\multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{2009}} \\[3pt] + +\end{tabularx} + +\vfill +\begin{center} +\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess8}\hfill% +\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess0} + +\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess1}\hfill% +\includegraphics[width=0.495\textwidth]{Bilder/ess2}\\ +{\footnotesize(Fotos: Martin Sievers)} +%\minipage[b]{0.495\textwidth} +%\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{Bilder/ess3} +%\endminipage\hfill% +%\minipage[b]{0.495\textwidth} +%\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{Bilder/ess6}\\[9.5mm] +%\includegraphics[width=\linewidth]{Bilder/ess5} +%\endminipage +\end{center} + +\clearpage + + +\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/dtk/dtk-adr.ist b/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/dtk/dtk-adr.ist index 629cc146228..8dbd8bb9f59 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/dtk/dtk-adr.ist +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/dtk/dtk-adr.ist @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ -%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv" +%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2005-03-23 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG" %% %%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $ +%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.8 2002/04/10 21:03:42 gene Exp gene $ %%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %% Purpose: %% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ %% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de %% %% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer -%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige +%% Copyright (C) 1997-2005 DANTE, Deutschsprachige %% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V. %% %% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dtk/dtk.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dtk/dtk.dtx deleted file mode 100644 index ef3248f0b1e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dtk/dtk.dtx +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4618 +0,0 @@ -%\iffalse -%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv" -%<*!ist> -%% -%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $ -%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% Purpose: -%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. -%% -%% Documentation: -%% The documentation can be generated from the original file -%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to -%% get the full documentation in DVI format. -%% -%% -%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer -%% Mainzer Str. 8 -%% 56321 Rhens (Germany) -%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de -%% -%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer -%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige -%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V. -%% -%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but -%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts -%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for -%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless -%% he says so in writing. -%% -%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute -%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any -%% modifications are indicated. -%% -%% -%<*class> -%% This class is still under development and may be replaced with a -%% new version which provides enhanced functionality. -%</class> -%<*!class> -%% This package is still under development and may be replaced with -%% a new version which provides enhanced functionality. -%</!class> -%% -%\fi -%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \title{A \LaTeX\ Class and Style for\\``Die \TeX{}nische -% Kom{\"o}die''\thanks{This file documents \filename\ version -% \fileversion\ as of \filedate.}} -% \author{Gerd Neugebauer\\ -% Mainzer Str.\ 8\\ -% 56321 Rhens (Germany)\\ -% Net: \texttt{gene@gerd-neugebauer.de}} -% -% \date{{\footnotesize Documentation date: \docdate}} -% -% \maketitle -% -%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% \changes{0.24}{1996/05/10}{First public release.} -% \changes{0.25}{1996/05/27}{Towards the new layout} -% \changes{0.26}{1996/05/27}{Towards the new layout} -% \changes{0.27}{1996/05/27}{Towards the new layout} -% \changes{0.28}{1996/05/27}{Towards the new layout} -% \changes{0.29}{1996/06/21}{Logos improved. ContentsArt slightly modified.} -% \changes{1.0}{1996/07/18}{The new layout is ready. (DTK 1/96 in print)} -% \changes{1.1}{1996/09/13}{Fixing a minor problem with long titles.\\ -% double backslash in titles are now ignored in headlines and toc.} -% \changes{1.3}{1997/02/08}{Ancient layout moved to a class option file.} -% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/02/04}{Merge changes due to RN made to -% generated files back into DTX (HjG).} -% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/02/04}{M-x delete-trailing-whitespace (HjG).} -% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/03/23}{File userpackages.tex now generated (RN/HjG).} -% \changes{1.9a}{2005/10/29}{added flushleft environment (RN/hv).} -% \changes{1.9b}{2006/08/11}{added macro CTANurl (hv).} -% \changes{1.10}{2007/08/28}{new dtx file created (hv).} -%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \DoNotIndex{\ ,\",\',\.,\[,\\,\],\^,\`,\~,\(,\),\,,\/,\-,\:,\=,\@,\~,\^} -% \DoNotIndex{\@M,\@dottedtocline} -% \DoNotIndex{\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@highpenalty,\@ifnextchar,\@ifstar} -% \DoNotIndex{\@ifundefined,\@namedef,\@plus,\@pnumwidth,\@startsection} -% \DoNotIndex{\@starttoc} -% \DoNotIndex{\@tempboxa,\@tempcnta} -% \DoNotIndex{\@tempdima,\@tempdimb,\@thefnmark,\@undefined} -% \DoNotIndex{\@ixpt,\@vpt,\@vipt,\@viipt,\@viiipt} -% \DoNotIndex{\@xpt,\@xipt,\@xiipt,\@xivpt,\@xviipt,\@xxpt,\@xxvpt} -% \DoNotIndex{\AA,\AE,\AtBeginDocument} -% \DoNotIndex{\CurrentOption,\DeclareOption,\H,\Huge,\L,\LARGE,\LaTeX,\Large} -% \DoNotIndex{\LoadClass,\O,\OE,\OptionNotUsed,\PassOptionsToClass} -% \DoNotIndex{\ProcessOptions,\ProvidesClass,\ProvidesPackage} -% \DoNotIndex{\RequirePackage,\TeX} -% \DoNotIndex{\aa,\addcontentsline,\addpenalty,\advance,\addvspace,\ae} -% \DoNotIndex{\ast,\arabic} -% \DoNotIndex{\b,\baselineskip,\begin,\begingroup,\bf,\bgroup,\egroup} -% \DoNotIndex{\bigskip,\box,\bullet} -% \DoNotIndex{\c,\cal,\catcode,\char,\chardef,\circ,\clearpage,\closein} -% \DoNotIndex{\closeout,\clubpenalty,\count,\csname} -% \DoNotIndex{\d,\def,\dimen,\diamond,\divide,\documentclass,\dp} -% \DoNotIndex{\divide} -% \DoNotIndex{\else,\em,\empty,\end,\endcsname,\endgroup,\endinput,\endlist} -% \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fbox,\fi,\footskip,\framebox,\frenchspacing} -% \DoNotIndex{\futurelet,\gdef,\global,\gobble} -% \DoNotIndex{\hangafter,\hangindent,\hbox,\headheight,\headsep,\hfil} -% \DoNotIndex{\hfill,\hrule,\hskip,\hspace,\hss,\ht,\huge,\ifcat,\ifcase} -% \DoNotIndex{\ifeof,\ifdim,\ifnum,\ifx} -% \DoNotIndex{\ignorespaces,\immediate,\index,\input,\it} -% \DoNotIndex{\itemindent,\itemsep,\jobname,\kern,\l,\labelsep,\labelwidth} -% \DoNotIndex{\large,\leavevmode,\leftmark,\leftskip,\let,\list} -% \DoNotIndex{\llap,\long,\lower} -% \DoNotIndex{\m@th,\makebox,\magstep,\makeindex,\markboth,\mbox,\medskip} -% \DoNotIndex{\multiply} -% \DoNotIndex{\newblock,\newcommand,\newcount,\newenvironment,\newfont} -% \DoNotIndex{\newif,\newpage,\newread,\newwrite} -% \DoNotIndex{\nobreak,\noindent,\normalsize,\null,\o,\oe} -% \DoNotIndex{\openin,\openout,\or,\pagestyle,\par,\paragraph,\parbox} -% \DoNotIndex{\parfillskip,\parindent,\parsep,\parskip,\partopsep} -% \DoNotIndex{\penalty,\quad} -% \DoNotIndex{\raggedbottom,\raise,\relax,\renewcommand,\renewenvironment} -% \DoNotIndex{\repeat,\rightskip,\rm,\rule} -% \DoNotIndex{\sbox,\sc,\scriptsize,\section,\selectfont,\setcounter} -% \DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\sf,\sfcode,\sl} -% \DoNotIndex{\sloppy,\small,\space,\ss,\string,\symbol} -% \DoNotIndex{\t,\tenex,\textstyle,\the,\thepage,\thispagestyle,\time,\tiny} -% \DoNotIndex{\topmargin,\topsep,\tt,\typeout} -% \DoNotIndex{\u,\unitlength,\usecounter,\v,\varepsilon,\vbox} -% \DoNotIndex{\vfill,\vsize,\vskip,\vspace,\vss} -% \DoNotIndex{\wd,\widowpenalty,\write,\xdef,\z@} -% -%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% \CheckSum{2624} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%</!ist> -% -% \begin{abstract} -% -% dtk.dtx provides a class and style file for typesetting ``Die -% \TeX\-nische Ko\-m\"o\-die''---the communications of the German -% \TeX{} Users Group DANTE e.V. This means that this class can be -% used by article writers to typeset a single article as well as to -% produce the complete journal. -% -% The class and style file is written in a way that it can be used -% both with \LaTeX\,2.09 and \LaTeXe. Thus it can be used by all -% persons which are familiar with any flavor of \LaTeX. -% -% The features of \LaTeXe\ are provided in the \LaTeX\,2.09 mode only -% to a certain extend. Thus it might not be possible to typeset an -% article prepared for \LaTeXe\ with \LaTeX\,2.09. -% -% On the other side it is possible to process an article prepared -% for \LaTeX\,2.09 with \LaTeXe{} (in native mode). This is justified -% since \LaTeXe{} is the standard nowadays and \LaTeX\,2.09 should -% cease to exists in the next decade. -% \end{abstract} -% -% \newpage -% \tableofcontents -% \newpage -% -% \section{The History} -% -% This documentclass/style is a complete reimplementation of a -% predecesor style. This predecessor style was a modification of -% the tugboat.sty which has been carried out mainly by Gabriele -% Kruljac. Some improvements have been made in this style by -% Joachim Schrod and Luzia Dietsche. -% -% In 1995 the it appeared necessary to have a document class for the -% production of ``Die \TeX nische Kom\"odie''. Up to this time the -% communications of the German speaking \TeX{} users group had been -% typeset with \LaTeX\,2.09 which was already outdated at this -% time. In addition ideas for an improved layout had been collected -% which should be incorporated into the new class. -% -% Thus Gerd Neugebauer started to derive a new class by modifying -% options and macros of the standard document class \texttt{article}. -% -% At this time it was not unususal for many installations not to -% provide the current \LaTeXe{} but still to have \LaTeX\,2.09 -% only. Thus one design decision was to have a document style as -% well as a document class. The requirement was met by providing a -% set of definitions which emulate some of the new features of -% \LaTeX{} under the old releases. -% -% The coding was done by Gerd Neugebauer but many influences of -% others have found their way into the code. Even so nearly no code -% has been taken from the predecessor style the layout has been -% copied in the first release of dtk.dtx (1.0). -% -% Into the next releases (1.1 to 1.3) many changes for the new -% layout have been incorporated. Many suggestions of the editorial -% board of ``Die \TeX nische Kom\"odie'' had been integrated. -% Especially the following persons contributed during this process: -% Luzia Dietsche, Bernd Raichle, Volker RW Schaa, Rainer Sch\"opf, -% and Andreas Dafferner. -% -% Over the years several additions and corrections have made it -% into some additional packages which have been used for the -% production of ``Die \TeX nische Kom\"odie''. Especially in 1999 -% the fonts have been changed from Computer Modern to EC. In 2000 -% the text area has been changed. Finally all changes have been -% integrated into dtk.dtx. The contributions for this release came -% from Bernd Raichle, Peter Willardt, Rolf Niepraschk, and Werner -% Lemberg. -% -% The 2002 edition of dtk.dtx includes some minor changes to -% support the use besides the production of ``Die \TeX nische -% Kom\"odie''. In addition the major change is that the -% bibliography is typeset in ragged right. -% -% -% \section{The User Interface} -% -% The user interface can be divided into two parts. The first part -% concerns the normal user who is writing a single article. The -% second part concerns the user who composes a complete journal. -% -% -% \subsection{The User Interface for Article Writers} -% -% The user interface for ordinary users is mainly the interface as -% it is provided by the documentclass article. In addition to the -% normal commands the following macros and environments are defined: -% -% \DescribeMacro{\address} -% This macro is used to put the address of an author into the list of -% authors. It should be given before the \verb|\maketitle| command. The -% first argument is the first name of an author. The second argument is the -% last name of the author. The third argument is it's address. Several -% lines in the address are separated by \verb|\\|. Missing arguments should -% be filled with \verb|\null|. -% -% Several invocations of \verb|address| are possible. E.g. if the article -% has been written by several authors. The address and the author can be -% omitted completely --- e.g. for anonoymous letters to the editor. But -% this should not be the normal case. -% -% \DescribeEnv{abstract} -% Each article should have be started with a short paragraph describing -% what this article is about. This paragraph is called abstract. The -% environment \verb|abstract| is meant for marking a paragraph as -% abstract. -% -% -% -% The following restrictions should be taken into account: -% -% The sectioning commands are mapped to their star variants. This -% means that the commands like \verb|\section| are not numbered. It -% should not be tried to to put references to those commands. -% -% The following logos are provided by this class and separately by -% the package \verb|dtklogos| if not defined somewhere else. You -% are strongly encouraged to use those macros to typeset the logos -% instead of making your own. -% \smallskip -% -% \begin{tabular}{ll} -% \texttt{\char'134AmSTeX} &\AmSTeX \\ -% \texttt{\char'134AmS} &\AmS \\ -% \texttt{\char'134BibTeX} &\BibTeX \\ -% \texttt{\char'134dante} &\dante \\ -% \texttt{\char'134Dante} &\Dante \\ -% \texttt{\char'134DTK} &\DTK \\ -% \texttt{\char'134eTeX} &\eTeX \\ -% \texttt{\char'134eV} &\eV \\ -% \texttt{\char'134emTeX} &\emTeX \\ -% \texttt{\char'134LAmSTeX} &\LAmSTeX \\ -% \texttt{\char'134LaTeXTeX} &\LaTeXTeX \\ -% \texttt{\char'134LaTeXe} &\LaTeXe \\ -% \texttt{\char'134LaTeX} &\LaTeX \\ -% \texttt{\char'134LyX} &\LyX \\ -% \texttt{\char'134METAFONT} &\MF \\ -% \texttt{\char'134METAPOST} &\MP \\ -% \texttt{\char'134MF} &\MF \\ -% \texttt{\char'134MP} &\MP \\ -% \texttt{\char'134MakeIndex}&\MakeIndex \\ -% \texttt{\char'134NFSS} &\NFSS \\ -% \texttt{\char'134NTS} &\NTS \\ -% \texttt{\char'134PS} &\PS \\ -% \texttt{\char'134PiCTeX} &\PiCTeX \\ -% \texttt{\char'134PubliCTeX}&\PubliCTeX \\ -% \texttt{\char'134TUG} &\TUG \\ -% \texttt{\char'134TeXXeT} &\TeXXeT \\ -% \texttt{\char'134TeXeT} &\TeXeT \\ -% \texttt{\char'134WinEdt} &\WinEdt \\ -% \texttt{\char'134WinEdtKK} &\WinEdtKK -% \end{tabular} -% -% \DescribeMacro{\footnote} -% Footnotes are typeset in a special way. As a consequence of the -% inplementation \TeX{} is not allowed to split footnotes across -% several pages. Thus you have to keep your footnotes short. It is -% bad style to pack the main body of text into footnotes (except -% for critical editions). -% -% \subsection{Logical Markup} -% -% One of the advantages of \LaTeX\ is the possiblity to use logical -% markup. For this purpose several markup macros are provided. -% Unfortunately the macros provided are not sufficient in several -% situations. Thus this class provides some additional markup -% macros to come closer to the ideal situation. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\File} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting file names. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\Package} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting package names. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\Program} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting program names. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\Command} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting command names. -% For instance command names are relevant when talking about Unix -% commands. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\Macro} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting macro names. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\Environment} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting environment names. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\Email} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting email addresses. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\CTANurl} -% Use this macro instead of \verb+\url+ for references to the \CTAN. -% It uses the \verb+\href+ and \verb+\nolinkurl+ from the package \Package{hyperref}. -% An example for a reference is \verb+\CTANurl{graphics/pstricks/}+: \CTANurl{graphics/pstricks/} -% -% \DescribeMacro{\Acronym} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting acronyms. It is -% highly recommended to use this macro sparsingly -% -% -% \subsection{The Interface for the Production of the Whole Journal} -% -% The first thing one needs to know is that a complete journal -% starts with a title page. This title page contains the volume, -% the number and the date of publication. Since part of this -% information is used later it is stored in macros. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\DieTeXnischeKomoedie} -% The macro \verb|\DieTeXnischeKomoedie| is provided for this purpose. It -% takes three arguments. The first argument is the number. The second -% argument is the annual set and the third argument is the publication -% date. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\CoverArt} -% The macro \verb|\DieTeXnischeKomoedie| calls the macro \verb|\CoverArt| -% to typeset the cover page. \verb|\CoverArt| gets the same three arguments -% as the calling macro \verb|\DieTeXnischeKomoedie|. This macro is -% responsible to fill the first page adequately. This maro might be -% redefined to alter the layout of the journal. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\Label} -% The macro \verb|\label| has been redefined to be local for each -% article. Thus it turned out to be necessary to allow assigning of -% labels which are not restricted by this ``module system''. The -% macro \verb|\Label| sets such a global label. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\Ref} -% The macro \verb|\ref| has been redefined to be local for each -% article. The macro \verb|\Ref| references a global label set with -% \verb|Label|. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\Pageref} -% The macro \verb|\pageref| has been redefined to be local for each -% article. The macro \verb|\Pageref| references a global label set with -% \verb|Label|. -% -% \DescribeMacro{\NeedPackage} -% Usually the article for the complete journal are stored in -% different files. If an article requires a package it has to be -% loaded in the preamble of the document. The macro -% \verb|\NeedPackage| provides a means to specify the required -% packages in the article files. Unfortunately \LaTeX{} does not -% provide a way to load missing packages in the document itself -% thus the only reasonable action for this macros is to issue a -% warning message if a needed package is not found. Nevertheless -% this helps finding potential problems. -% -% -% -% -% \vfill\noindent\hrulefill%^^A--------------------------------------------- -% -% \emph{To be completed} -% -% \noindent\hrulefill\vfill\null%^^A---------------------------------------- -% -% -% \subsection{The Interface for the Production of PDF Reprints} -% -% A reprint of an article can be produced in PDF format. To -% accomplish this the package \texttt{dtk-pdf} is provided. This -% package makes provisions to produce an appropriate header and -% typeset the address information at the end. -% -% To use the package you can use a driver file with the following -% structure: -% -% \begin{quote} -% \verb|\documentclass{dtk}|\\ -% \texttt{\textit{preamble for article}}\\ -% \verb|\usepackage{dtk-pdf}|\\ -% \verb|\renewcommand\Volume{|\texttt{\textit{volume}}\verb|}|\\ -% \verb|\renewcommand\Pages{|\texttt{\textit{pages}}\verb|}|\\ -% \verb|\begin{document}|\\ -% \verb|\input{|\texttt{\textit{tex\_file}}\verb|}|\\ -% \verb|\Address|\\ -% \verb|\end{document}| -% \end{quote} -% -% Here \texttt{\textit{preamble for article}} should be replaced by -% the document preamble required for the production of the article. -% \texttt{\textit{volume}} is the volume of ``Die \TeX nische -% Kom\"odie'' in which the article has been published originally. -% \texttt{\textit{pages}} is the range of pages on which is has -% been published. Finally the article itself is included. This -% assumes that the article---without preamble---is contained in a -% file by its own. -% -% -% -% -% -% \section{Notes on the Production of the Journal} -% -% Several problems have to be solved for the production os the -% whole journal. This section collects some of them and shows which -% roads have been taken. -% -% \subsection{References} -% References are done in \LaTeX\ with \verb|\label| and -% \verb|\ref|. Since several articles are collected in the -% complete journal it may happen that the same label is used in -% different articles. To avoid name clashes the definitions of -% \verb|\label| and \verb|\ref| have been modified to prepend a -% unique prefix. -% -% To enable you to make references across articles the original -% definitions of \verb|\label| and \verb|\ref| have been saved in -% \verb|\Label| and \verb|\Ref| respectively. -% -% -% \subsection{List of Authors} -% The list of authors is collected for the whole journal. This list -% is sorted alphabetically. To automate this process the names are -% written to the index file and makeindex is used to perform the -% sorting. Thus it is necessary for the complete journal to be run -% through \LaTeX, makeindex, and \LaTeX\ again. -% -% -% \subsection{Bibliography} -% The bibliography is prepared with \BibTeX. Since several articles -% are compiled we assume that the single articles are processed -% separately before. During this processing \BibTeX\ can be used to -% generate the appropriate bbl file. -% Things are arranged to include the bbl file for the article in -% question. -% -% One problem is not solved. This is the uniqueness of the \BibTeX\ -% labels. Here manual invention is required. -% -% -% \StopEventually{} -% \newpage -% \if@undefined\environment -% \newenvironment{environment}[1]{}{} -% \fi -% -% -% \section{The Version Information} -% -% The following lines define the version information for the class -% and the pdf package file. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class|pdf|logos> -\def\DTKrcs$#1: #2 #3${#2} -\def\filename{dtk.dtx} -\xdef\fileversion{\DTKrcs$Revision: 1.10 $} -\xdef\filedate{\DTKrcs$Date: 2007/08/28 18:17:42 $} -\let\docversion=\fileversion -\let\docdate=\filedate -%</class|pdf|logos> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \section{The Documentation Driver} -% -% The documentation driver changes dtk.dtx into a self-extracting -% documentation. Thus it is possible to run \LaTeX{} on dtk.dtx to -% produce the documentation. -% -% The documentation can be adapted in a file named dtk.dcf -% (documentation configuration). This file can contain instructions -% for \verb|docstrip|. Especially useful might be the instruction -% -% \verb|\OnlyDescription| -% -% which supresses the generation of the implementation description. -% -% \changes{1.3}{1997/01/27}{The documentation driver has been -% integrated.} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*driver> -\documentclass{ltxdoc} -\usepackage{dtklogos} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Modify the behaviour of \verb|ltxdoc|. Those settings can be -% overwritten with local settings afterwards. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\RecordChanges -\EnableCrossrefs -\CodelineIndex -\setcounter{IndexColumns}2 -\setlength{\parskip}{.5ex} -\setlength{\parindent}{0pt} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Local configurations can be made in \verb|dtk.dcf|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\InputIfFileExists{dtk.dcf}{}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Define some logos. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\begin{document} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Ready to read the dtx file. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeleteShortVerb{|} -\DocInput{dtk.dtx} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We want to see the change log. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newpage -\PrintChanges -% \end{macrocode} -% -% An index is highly desirable. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newpage -\PrintIndex -% \end{macrocode} -% -% That's it. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\end{document} -%</driver> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \section{The Implementation} -% -% -% The implementation is mainly based on existing styles/classes. This file -% contains only adaptions required to provide the logical markup -% and the definitions to get the special layout of ``Die \TeX -% nische Kom\"odie''. -% -% -% \subsection{Basic Definitions} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we need a boolean to see if we are in the author version or -% in the full version. The author version has several commands -% disabled. The full version is turned on by giving the option -% \verb|full| to the documentclass/style command. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifDTK@Author@ -\DTK@Author@true -% \end{macrocode} -% -% ??? -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifDTK@Draft@ -\newif\ifDTK@lineno@ -\DTK@lineno@false -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The boolean \verb|DTK@german@| is used to determine if the german -% package should be loaded automatically. Usually it is turned on. -% Under certain circumstances it might be necessary to load other -% packages before the german package. Thus this variable can be set -% via a package option. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifDTK@german@ -\DTK@german@true -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsection{Compatibility Definitions} -% -% Since we want to use this style with \LaTeX\,2.09 and \LaTeXe{} we have -% to define a common interface. For this purpose we use a subset of -% the style writers interface already defined for \LaTeXe{} style -% writers. Since some macros are not defined in \LaTeX\,2.09 we -% implement them --- at least to the degree needed here. -% -% Starting with release 1.4 the backward compatibility may not work -% any longer. It will be eliminated in a future release. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifx\documentclass\@undefined -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage} -% The macro \verb|RequirePackage| simply tries to load the appropriate -% style file. The category code of \verb|@| is changed temporarily. -% The old value is is saved in \verb|\DTK@cat| and restored at the end. -% -% Optional arguments are not supported, yet. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcommand\RequirePackage[1]{ - \chardef\DTK@cat=\the\catcode`\@ - \catcode`\@=11 - \input{#1.sty}% - \catcode`\@=\DTK@cat} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\LoadClass} -% The concept of class and package files has not been so different in -% \LaTeX\,2.09. Thus the same that has been said for \verb|\RequirePackage| -% holds also for the macro \verb|\LoadClass|. Thus we just make it a -% synonym. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\LoadClass=\RequirePackage -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\InputIfFileExists} -% Now things get a little bit more complicated. To implement the -% macro \verb|\InputIfFileExists| we try to open the file. If this -% fails we assume that the file does not exist. The appropriate -% action is performed in both cases. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcommand\InputIfFileExists[3]{% - \openin\DTK@file #1 - \ifeof\DTK@file\closein\DTK@file #3% - \else\closein\DTK@file #2\input{#1}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption} -% The options in \LaTeX\,2.09 are defined as special named -% macros. This is emulated here. The star variant is simply mapped -% to do nothing. -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcommand\DeclareOption{\@ifstar{\@gobble}{\DTK@DeclareOption}} - \newcommand\DTK@DeclareOption[2]{\@namedef{ds@#1}{#2}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ProcessOptions} -% In \LaTeX\,2.09 the options are processed automatically. Thus -% this macro is simply a noop. -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\ProcessOptions=\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\OptionNotUsed} -% This feature is not present in \LaTeX\,2.09. Thus the argument is -% silently absorbed and the macro is simply a noop. -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\OptionNotUsed=\gobble -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesClass} -% This declaration is used to type out the version information. -% \begin{macrocode} - \def\ProvidesClass#1[#2]{\typeout{Document Style #1 #2}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Just for fun we define some font switching commands. In fact the -% behaviour in \LaTeXe{} is more complex. But I think these -% definitions are enough to avoid errors. -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcommand\emph[1]{{\em #1}\/} - \newcommand\textbf[1]{{\bf #1}} - \newcommand\textrm[1]{{\rm #1}} - \newcommand\textsc[1]{{\sc #1}} - \newcommand\textsf[1]{{\sf #1}} - \newcommand\textsl[1]{{\sl #1\/}} - \newcommand\textit[1]{{\it #1\/}} - \newcommand\texttt[1]{{\tt #1}} - - \@ifundefined{fontshape}{\let\fontshape=\@gobble}{} - \@ifundefined{selectfont}{\let\selectfont=\relax}{} - - \newcommand\providescommand[2]{\ifx#1\@undefined\newcommand#1{#2}\fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We need a new handle to read files. This handle will be used to -% implement \verb|\InputIfFileExists|. Since \verb|\newread| is -% declared \verb|\outer| we have to allocate the new handle here. It is -% just used in the \LaTeX\,2.09 mode. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newread\DTK@file -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we can continue without considering the \LaTeX{} dialect any -% more. Any changes we make from now on are exclusivly based on the -% interface defined above. -% -% This is all we had to do to implement the compatibility mode. It might -% turn out that more features are desirable. Those extensions are left to -% future versions of this class, eh sorry, style. -% -% -% -% \subsection{Initializations} -% -% -% Now we can start to define the class. The version date is taken -% from the macro \verb|\filedate|. This macro is defined at the -% beginning of this file. The value is changed by the version -% control system RCS. -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/21}{File version added to class identifier.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvidesClass{dtk}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space gene] -% \end{macrocode} -% -% ??? -% -% \begin{macrocode} -% RN 2005-01-15, siehe `bibtopic.sty'. -\newcommand\DTK@isnum[1]{% - \if!\ifnum9<1#1!\else_\fi - \expandafter\@firstoftwo - \else - \expandafter\@secondoftwo - \fi -} -% RN 2005-01-31 -\newcommand*\DTK@@thelinenumber{\thepage-\arabic{linenumber}} -%%%% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The options to switch to other point sizes are disabled. Nobody -% is supposed to use this class with another than the single design -% size. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{10pt}{\OptionNotUsed} -\DeclareOption{11pt}{\OptionNotUsed} -\DeclareOption{12pt}{\OptionNotUsed} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The options to switch the oneside and twoside settings are -% disabled. Nobody is supposed to use this class with another than -% the single design size. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{twoside}{\OptionNotUsed} -\DeclareOption{oneside}{\OptionNotUsed} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We define an internal style option ``full''. This loads -% the multicolumn package from the Mainz distribution. It is only -% needed to produce the full journal. Additionally several macros -% are only defined in the full version. This makes sure that authors can -% not play with too much internal macros. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{full}{\DTK@Author@false} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The package option \verb|omitgerman| can be used to omit the -% loading of the package \verb|german.sty|. This migth be necessary -% if packages are required which have to be loaded before -% \verb|german|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{omitgerman}{\DTK@german@false} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% In 1996 the layout of ``Die TeXnische Kom\"odie'' has been -% changed. The option \verb|ancient| can be used to switch back to -% the old layout. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{ancient}{\def\DTK@layout{95}} -% \end{macrocode} -% ??? -% \begin{macrocode} -% RN 2005-01-16 -\DeclareOption{draft}{% - \DTK@Draft@true - \DTK@lineno@true - \PassOptionsToPackage{pagewise}{lineno}% - \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{book}% -} -% RN 2005-01-30 -\DeclareOption{linenumbers}{\DTK@lineno@true} -\DeclareOption{nolinenumbers}{\DTK@lineno@false} -\DeclareOption{pagewise}{% - \PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{lineno}} -\DeclareOption{running}{% - \PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{lineno}} -% RN 2005-01-31 -% RN/HjG 2005-02-11 -% Ein grauenvoller Hack! -\DeclareOption{ln-long}{\def\DTK@@thelinenumber{% - %\def\Hugo{% - \ifoddNumberedPage% eigtl. Even!!! - \ifodd\c@page - \@tempswatrue %C - \else - \@tempswafalse %D - \fi - \else - \ifodd\c@page - \@tempswafalse %A - \else - \@tempswatrue %B - \fi - \fi - %}\Hugo - %\@tempcnta=\c@page - %\if@tempswa \advance\@tempcnta\@ne \fi - \if@tempswa \advance\c@page\@ne \fi - %\edef\thepage{\the\@tempcnta}% - \thepage-\arabic{linenumber}}} -\DeclareOption{ln-short}{\def\DTK@@thelinenumber{% - \arabic{linenumber}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% ??? Now done better! -% \begin{macrocode} -\iffalse% RN 2005-01-15 -\DeclareOption{95}{\def\DTK@layout{95}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{96}{\def\DTK@layout{96}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{97}{\def\DTK@layout{97}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{98}{\def\DTK@layout{98}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{99}{\def\DTK@layout{99}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{Option for 2000 added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{00}{\def\DTK@layout{00}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{1.5}{2001/04/23}{Option for 2001 added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{01}{\def\DTK@layout{01}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{1.7}{2001/10/04}{Option for 2002 added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption{02}{\def\DTK@layout{02}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The remaining options are handed down to the base class \verb|book|. -% This works for \LaTeXe{} and is a noop for \LaTeX\,2.09. -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{book}} -% \end{macrocode} -% ??? This is the way \dots! -% \begin{macrocode} -\else -\DeclareOption*{% - \DTK@isnum{\CurrentOption}% - {\edef\DTK@layout{\CurrentOption}}% - {\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{book}}% -} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we can process all options. Again this works for \LaTeXe{} -% and is a noop for \LaTeX\,2.09 since the options are -% automatically processed there. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProcessOptions -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Loading the Used Packages/Styles} -% -% This class is a variation of the \verb|book| class. Thus -% we load the base class. This loading is done with the macro from -% the interface definition or the built-in \LaTeXe{} primitive. -% \begin{macrocode} -\LoadClass{book} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% ??? -% -% \begin{macrocode} -% RN 2005-01-30 -\ifDTK@lineno@ - \RequirePackage{lineno}\linenumbers - \RequirePackage{color}% - \linenumbersep=.8ex - \def\linenumberfont{\normalfont\scriptsize\sffamily\bfseries}% - \definecolor{DTK@lineno@color}{cmyk}{0.26,0,0.76,0}% SpringGreen - \def\thelinenumber{% - \begingroup - \fboxsep=.3ex\fcolorbox{black}{DTK@lineno@color}{% - \DTK@@thelinenumber}% - \endgroup}% -\fi -%%%%%%%%%% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The T1 font encoding is used. -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{T1 font encoding enabled.} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% ??? -% -% \begin{macrocode} -% RN 2005-01-15 -\IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\RequirePackage{lmodern}}{} -\RequirePackage[full]{textcomp} -% RN/HjG 2005-03-23 -\ifDTK@Author@\else - \RequirePackage[utf8]{inputenc} -\fi -\usepackage[hyphens]{url} -\usepackage[newcommands,newparameters]{ragged2e} -\@ifundefined{flushleft} - {\let\flushleft\FlushLeft\let\endflushleft\endFlushLeft}{} -% -\usepackage{filecontents} -%</class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For old issues of the journal the OT1 font encoding is used -% instead. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*1995|1996|1997|1998> -\RequirePackage[OT1]{fontenc} -%</1995|1996|1997|1998> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The package ``\texttt{ngerman}'' is used since this class is -% intended to be used by german users mainly. As one result the -% language is set to german as default. On the other side some -% parameters are modified to get a layout according to german -% habits. E.g. fench spacing is activated. -% -% There are some known problems when (n)german.sty is used. Therefore -% it might turn out necessary to load (n)german.sty after other -% packages have been loaded. For this purpose the option -% |omitgerman| can be used. To ensure proper operation of dtk it is -% necesary to call the macro \verb|\DTKgerman| after the style -% (n)german has been loaded. -% -% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/03}{The package ngerman is used to support -% the current orthography.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTK@german@ -\RequirePackage{ngerman} -\selectlanguage{ngerman} -\else -\typeout{*** Warning: Loading of (n)german has been omitted. You have to - load it manually.} -\typeout{*** Don't forget to use the macro \string\DTKgerman\space - afterwards.} -\fi -%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999> -\ifDTK@german@ -\RequirePackage{german} -\selectlanguage{german} -\fi -%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The package ``\texttt{multicol}'' is used in the full version. Thus -% we only load it if the option \verb|full| has been given. -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{Packages graphicx and color are required.} -% \begin{macrocode} -% RN 2005-01-22 -% Mindestens `multicol' wird auch im Autormodus gebraucht, falls dort -% ein Index erstellt wird. Vermutlich "graphicx,color" ("xcolor"?) auch -% so allemeing\"ultig, dass es vorgezogen werden sollte! -\RequirePackage{multicol} -\ifDTK@Author@\else -% \RequirePackage{multicol} - \RequirePackage{graphicx,color} -% RN 2005-01-22 - \errorcontextlines=100\relax -\fi -\RequirePackage{dtklogos} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\NeedPackage} -% \changes{1.3}{1997/01/29}{Macro added.} -% This macro can be used to declare in a single article which -% packages are required. At this places it is too late to load -% them if they are not loaded already. In stead a fat message is -% presented which warns the user of potential problems. -% -% This macro takes a single argument which is the name of -% \emph{one} package. Multiple packages and versions are not -% supported (yet). -% -% This macro is copied and modified from an \LaTeX2\ (june 1996) -% internal. It seems as \LaTeXe\ defines a control sequences for -% each package which is loaded. This mechanism is exploited. -% -% Since older versions of \LaTeX\ do not support this mechanism -% warning are reported even so everything is ok. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\NeedPackage[1]{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname ver@#1.sty\endcsname\relax - \typeout{***}% - \typeout{***}% - \typeout{*** The required package `#1' seems not to be loaded.}% - \typeout{*** I try to stumble along as good as I can.}% - \typeout{*** Expect some undefined macros or other errors.}% - \typeout{***}% - \typeout{***}% - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Layout Parameters} -% -% The layout can be influenced by a large number of -% parameters. Thus the design decisions have been made transparent -% (to a certain degree at least). These options are not meant to be -% changed except when a new layout is being designed and implemented. -% -% -% The size of the paper is A5. Thus the paper dimensions are defined -% appropriately. -% \begin{macrocode} -\paperwidth = 148.5mm -\paperheight = 210mm -% \end{macrocode} -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{New page dimensions for 1/2000.} -% The height is set to 471\,pt; the width is 342pt. -% \begin{macrocode} -\textheight = 471pt -\textwidth = 333pt -%</class> -% \end{macrocode} -% The height is set to 484\,pt = 170.10654\,mm; the -% width is 342\,pt = 120.19925\,mm. This is slightly larger than in the -% predecessor style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999> -\textheight = 484pt -\textwidth = 342pt -%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The page is flushed left. A left margin of one inch is the default -% on any properly installed printer. Any adjustment of the -% printable area on the page is left to the output driver. -% \begin{macrocode} -\oddsidemargin = 0pt -\evensidemargin = \oddsidemargin\oddsidemargin -35.89157pt -\evensidemargin -17.70235pt -\topmargin -55.66684pt -%\topmargin = 0pt% RN 2005-01-16 -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The head line needs some space. In fact this depends on some -% configurable macros. Nevertheless we take the old values and -% leave it to a user to change those values if required. -% \begin{macrocode} -\headheight = 17pt -\headsep = 17pt -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\headheight = 14pt -\headsep = 12pt -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The foot line needs some space. The same remarks given above -% apply here too. -% \begin{macrocode} -\footskip = 24pt -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\footskip = 21pt -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Paragraphs are not indented but separated by additional lead -% only. This lead may expand a little bit but it may not -% shrink. (Since the whole journal is typeset with raggedbottom it -% is not clear to me if this makes sense at all) -% \begin{macrocode} -\parskip = 0.5\baselineskip \advance\parskip by 0pt plus 2pt -\parindent = 0pt -% \end{macrocode} -% -% To reduce the probability that a float requires a complete page -% we increase the allowed fraction which can be occupied by floats -% at the top and the bottom of the page. Additionally we reduce the -% fraction required for text. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\topfraction{.9} -\renewcommand\bottomfraction{.9} -\renewcommand\textfraction{.1} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/21}{columnsep reduced to 5pt} -% \begin{macrocode} -\columnsep = 5pt -%</class> -%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999> -\columnsep = 10pt -%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{1.5}{2001/04/24}{emergencystretch set to 1.5em.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\emergencystretch = 1.5em -%</class> -%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999|2000> -\emergencystretch = 0pt -%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999|2000> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% As promised before we disable vertical adjustment of pages. This -% seems to be a good strategy to avoid ragged apearance by too much -% space between paragraphs. -% \begin{macrocode} -\raggedbottom -% \end{macrocode} -% -% To avoid a bad layout we adjust some parameters. Thus we try to -% avoid widows and clubs. -% \begin{macrocode} -\clubpenalty = 10000 -\widowpenalty = 10000 -% \end{macrocode} -% ??? -% \begin{macrocode} -% RN 2005-01-16 ??? -\marginparwidth=1cm -%\marginparsep=\z@ -\@ifdefinable\DTK@orig@marginpar{\let\DTK@orig@marginpar\marginpar} -\renewcommand*\marginpar{% - \ClassWarning{dtk}{Command `\string\marginpar' not expected}% - \DTK@orig@marginpar} -% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\DTKgerman} -% We will change some of the captions names used within \LaTeX{}. To avoid -% that the package ``\texttt{german}'' undoes our efforts we anchor the -% changes in the \verb|\captionsgerman| macro. To do so we have to save the -% old meaning in an internal name. -% \changes{1.5}{2001/04/24}{Method for ngerman added} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\DTKgerman{ - \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman - \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman - \@ifundefined{l@ngerman}{}{\selectlanguage{ngerman}}% -} -%</class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999> -\renewcommand\DTKgerman{ - \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman - \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman - \selectlanguage{german}% -} -%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\DTK@captionsgerman} -% -% Now we can redefine the captions command. First of all we use the -% old definition. Thus we avoid duplicating the whole definition -% and maybe getting in trouble with some future version. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\DTK@captionsgerman{ - \DTK@captionsgerman -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\refname} -% Just in case that an article contains a list of references we -% define the title for this section. -% Well, in fact we assume that the \LaTeX{} used is not too -% ancient. Otherwise this will not work properly. -% \begin{macrocode} - \gdef\refname{Literatur}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\bibname} -% Ok. And now the same trick for the title of the bibliography. -% \begin{macrocode} - \gdef\bibname{Literatur}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\contentsname} -% The headline for the table of contents is defined appropriately. -% \verb|\volume| contains the number of the current volume. This -% number is set by the macro producing the front page. -% \begin{macrocode} - \gdef\contentsname{Inhalt Heft \Volume}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% Now we are done. We just have to make sure that the new values -% are activated by calling the new captions macros. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% If the option german has been loaded automatically then we have -% to modify the captions at once. Otherwise the user is responsible -% to call \verb|\DTKgerman| after the package german has been loaded. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTK@german@ - \DTKgerman -\fi -%</class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999> -\ifDTK@german@ - \DTKgerman -\fi -%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\addressname} -% The heading for the list of authors is defined in this macro. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\addressname{Autoren/Organisatoren} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\journalname} -% The name of the journal is stored in this macro. This should make -% it easier to use this class for other purposes than typesetting -% ``Die \TeX nische Kom\"odie''. It is not the primary intention to -% support this but some attempts have been made to use this class -% for other publications. -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{Macro introduced.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\journalname{Die \TeX nische Kom{\"o}die} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\volume} -% The number of the current volume is stored in this macro. The -% value is automatically set with the macro -% \verb|\DieTeXnischeKomoedie|. Since this macro is usually only -% used in the full version we provide a reasonable default. -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{Current date and time added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\Volume{?/??} -\newcommand\volume{\Volume\ --- Entwurf \today\ - \begingroup - \count1=\time\divide\count1 60 - \count2=\count1 \multiply\count2 -60 \advance\count2\time - \ifnum\count1<10 0\fi\the\count1:\ifnum\count2<10 0\fi\the\count2 - \endgroup -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% ??? -% \begin{macrocode} -% RN 2005-01-17 -\newcommand*\DTK@corr@version{} -\ifDTK@Author@\else - \newcommand*\DTK@today{}% - \begingroup - \count@\time - \divide\count@ 60\relax - \count2=-\count@ - \multiply\count2 60\relax - \advance\count2 \time - %% \loggingall %% Wuduh! - \xdef\DTK@today{% - \the\year-\two@digits{\the\month}-\two@digits{\the\day}% %!!! \the - %\protect~% Warum geht das nicht? - \noexpand\noexpand~% - %% Wuduh! 2 \noexpand noetig? Weil \number\the 2mal zuschlaegt? - %% Ohne \the langt 1 \noexpand! - \two@digits{\the\count@}:\two@digits{\the\count2}}% - %%\show\DTK@today - \endgroup - \ifDTK@Draft@ - \def\DTK@corr@version{\fbox{Korrekturversion:~\DTK@today}}% - \AtEndOfClass{% - \let\ps@empty=\ps@plain - \let\ps@part=\ps@plain}% - \else - \let\@LN\@gobbletwo% Wegen .aux-Datei von vorherigem lineno-Lauf - \let\@LN@col\@gobble - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\footmark} -% This macro contains the text of the running foot. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\footmark{\journalname\ \volume} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ChapterFont} -% This macro contains the font changing command issued before -% typesetting a chapter title. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\ChapterFont{\Large\sf} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\ChapterFont{\Large\bf} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\SectionFont} -% This macro contains the font changing command issued before -% typesetting the section heading. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\SectionFont{\large\sf} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\SectionFont{\normalsize\bf} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\SubsectionFont} -% This macro contains the font changing command issued before -% typesetting the subsection heading. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\SubsectionFont{\normalsize\sf} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\SubsectionFont{\normalsize\it} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\SubsubsectionFont} -% This macro contains the font changing command issued before -% typesetting the subsubsection heading and below. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\SubsubsectionFont{\normalsize\sf} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\SubsubsectionFont{\normalsize\it} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\AuthorFont} -% This macro contains the font changing command issued before -% typeseting the author of an article. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\AuthorFont{\large\sf} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\AuthorFont{\normalsize\rm} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\TitleFont} -% This macro contains the font changing command issued before -% typeseting the title of an article. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\TitleFont{\Large\sf} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\TitleFont{\large\bf} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\HeadFont} -% This macro contains the font changing command issued before -% typeseting the running head line. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\HeadFont{\sf\fontshape{sl}\selectfont} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\HeadFont{\sl} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\FootFont} -% This macro contains the font changing command issued before -% typeseting the running foot line. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\FootFont{\footnotesize\sf\fontshape{sl}\selectfont} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\FootFont{\footnotesize\sl} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\PagenoFont} -% This macro contains the font changing command issued before -% typeseting the page number. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\PagenoFont{\sf} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\PagenoFont{\rm} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\NewpageThreshold} -% The macro \verb|\NewpageThreshold| is used to determine how much -% space is needed on a page to start a new article. If less space -% is left then the next article is started on the next page. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\NewpageThreshold{100pt} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\HeadRuleDepth} -% This macro contains the depth of the line between the running -% head and the main body of text. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\HeadRuleDepth{0pt} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\HeadRuleDepth{0.1pt} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\FootRuleDepth} -% This macro contains the depth of the line between the running -% foot and the main body of text. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\FootRuleDepth{0pt} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\FootRuleDepth{0.1pt} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ContentsParSkip} -% This macro contains the \verb|parskip| used for the table of -% contents. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\ContentsParSkip{1pt} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Size Changing Commands and Mathematics} -% -% The size changing commands \verb|\small| and \verb|\footnotesize| -% redefine also \verb|\@listi|. This effect has to be undone. -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\DTK@math} -% This macro modifies the relavant parameters for typesetting -% mathematics. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\DTK@math{% - \abovedisplayskip = 4pt plus 2pt minus 1pt - \belowdisplayskip = \abovedisplayskip - \abovedisplayshortskip = 2pt plus 2pt - \belowdisplayshortskip = \abovedisplayshortskip -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@normalsize} -% This is an internal size changing command. We save the old -% definition in \verb|\DTK@@normalsize| and redefine it. After the -% old definition is used some sizes are changed to a smaller value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\DTK@@normalsize=\@normalsize -\def\@normalsize{% - \DTK@@normalsize - \DTK@math - \let\@listi=\@listI} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\normalsize} -% This is a size changing command. We save the old -% definition in the macro \verb|\DTK@normalsize| and redefine -% it. After the old definition is used some sizes are changed to a -% smaller value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\DTK@normalsize=\normalsize -\renewcommand\normalsize{% - \DTK@normalsize - \DTK@math - \let\@listi=\@listI} -\normalsize -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\small} -% This is a size changing command. We save the old -% definition in \verb|\DTK@small| and redefine it. After the -% old definition is used some sizes are changed to a smaller value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\DTK@small=\small -\renewcommand\small{% - \DTK@small - \DTK@math - \let\@listi=\@listI} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\footnotesize} -% This is a size changing command. We save the old -% definition in the macro \verb|\DTK@footnotesize| and redefine -% it. After the old definition is used some sizes are changed to a -% smaller value. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\DTK@footnotesize=\footnotesize -\renewcommand\footnotesize{% - \DTK@footnotesize - \DTK@math - \let\@listi=\@listI} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Path} -% \changes{1.3}{1997/01/28}{Macro added.} -% This macro can be used to typeset paths to network sources like -% ftp directories or URLs as well as email addresses. The argument -% is typeset in a teletype font. Underscores and tildes are treated -% as ordinary characters. Linebreaking is enabled after certain -% special characters without inserting a hyphen. -% -% Unfortunately this macro is fragile. -% \begin{macrocode} -\begingroup -\gdef\Path@SepI{/""} -\gdef\Path@SepII{\symbol{92}""} -\gdef\Path@SepIII{:""} -\catcode`\/=13 -\catcode`\:=13 -\catcode`\^=0 -^catcode`\\=13 -^gdef^Path{^begingroup - ^catcode`^/=13 - ^catcode`^\=13 - ^catcode`^:=13 - ^catcode`^~=12 - ^catcode`^$=12 %$ - ^catcode`^_=12 - ^catcode`^#=12 - ^let/=^Path@SepI - ^let\=^Path@SepII - ^let:=^Path@SepIII - ^@Path} -^gdef^@Path#1{^texttt{#1}^endgroup} -^endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Logical Markup} -% -% One of the advantages of \LaTeX\ is the possiblity to use logical -% markup. For this purpose several markup macros are provided. -% Unfortunately the macros provided are not sufficient in several -% situations. Thus this class provides some additional markup -% macros to come closer to the ideal situation. -% -% \begin{macro}{\File} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting file names. -% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\File[1]{\texttt{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Package} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting package names. -% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\Package[1]{\texttt{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Program} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting program names. -% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\Program[1]{\texttt{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Command} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting command names. -% For instance command names are relevant when talking about Unix -% commands. -% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\Command[1]{\texttt{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Macro} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting macro names. -% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\Macro[1]{\texttt{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Environment} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting environment names. -% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\Environment[1]{\texttt{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Email} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting email addresses. -% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\Email[1]{\texttt{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\CTANurl} -%% hv 2006-08-11 -% Use this macro instead of \verb+\url+ for references to the \CTAN. -% It uses the \verb+\href+ and \verb+\nolinkurl+ from the package \Package{hyperref} -% or alternative the \Package{url} and an empty \Command{href}, if hyprref isn't loaded. -% An example for a reference is \verb+\CTANurl{graphics/pstricks/}+: \CTANurl{graphics/pstricks/} -\providecommand*{\nolinkurl}{\url} -\providecommand*{\href}[1]{} -\newcommand*{\CTANurl}[1]{% - \href{ftp://ftp.ctan.org/tex-archive/#1}{\nolinkurl{CTAN:#1}}% -} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Acronym} -% This macro is intended to be used for typesetting acronyms. It is -% highly recommended to use this macro sparsingly -% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/04}{macro added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\Acronym[1]{\textsc{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{List Making Environments} -% -% The list making environments \verb|description|, \verb|itemize|, -% and \verb|enumerate| are adapted to use less vertical space. This -% is mainly done by resetting \verb|\parsep|, \verb|\itemsep|, and -% \verb|\topsep|. -% -% The environments \verb|itemize| and \verb|enumerate| use the -% macros \verb|@listi|, \verb|@listii|, etc. Thus it is sufficient -% to redefine those macros. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@listI{% - \leftmargin = \leftmargini - \parsep = \parskip - \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt - \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\@listi=\@listI -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@listii{% - \leftmargin = \leftmarginii - \labelwidth = \leftmarginii - \advance \labelwidth by-\labelsep - \parsep = \parskip - \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt - \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\@listiii{% - \leftmargin = \leftmarginiii - \labelwidth = \leftmarginiii - \advance \labelwidth by-\labelsep - \partopsep = 1pt plus 0pt minus 1pt - \parsep = \parskip - \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt - \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt} -% \end{macrocode} -% We activate the defaults. -% \begin{macrocode} -\@listi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For some reason \verb|@listi| is redefined in \verb|small| and -% \verb|\footnotesize|. Thus we have to take care to undo the -% changes made there. For this purpose we save the old definitions -% and restore the intended meaning of \verb|\@listi| after calling -% the old macro. -% -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\labelitemi{$\m@th\circ$} -\renewcommand\labelitemii{$\m@th\triangleright$} -\renewcommand\labelitemiii{$\m@th\diamond$} -\setlength\leftmargini{1.5em} -\setlength\leftmarginii{1.4em} -\setlength\leftmarginiii{1.3em} -\setlength\leftmarginiv{1.2em} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\labelitemi{$\m@th\bullet$} -\renewcommand\labelitemii{\bf --} -\renewcommand\labelitemiii{$\m@th\ast$} -\setlength\leftmargini{2.5em} -\setlength\leftmarginii{2.2em} -\setlength\leftmarginiii{1.87em} -\setlength\leftmarginiv{1.7em} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{environment}{description} -% To get things smaller we completely redefine the description -% environment. Nevertheless we make use of the old label formatting -% macro. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewenvironment{description}{% - \begin{list}{}{% - \labelwidth = 0pt - \itemindent = -\leftmargin - \parsep = \parskip - \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt - \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt - \let\makelabel=\descriptionlabel}% - }{\end{list}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% -% \begin{macro}{descriptionlabel} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\descriptionlabel[1]{% - \hspace\labelsep{\normalsize\it #1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep \bf #1} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{environment}{quotation} -% Since the whole journal does not use parindent we make the -% quotation environment the same as the quote environment. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewenvironment{quotation}{% - \list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}% - \item\relax -}{\endlist} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewenvironment{quotation}{% - \list{}{\listparindent 1.5em - \itemindent\listparindent - \rightmargin\leftmargin\parsep \z@ plus\p@}% - \item\relax -}{\endlist} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% -% \begin{environment}{roll} -% We add a new type of list making environment. The \verb|roll| -% does not indent per default but just typesets the argument of the -% \verb|\item| macro in boldface. It has one optional argument -% which can be used to specify the amount of indentation desired. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{roll}% - {\@ifnextchar[{\r@ll}{\r@ll[0pt]}}% - {\end{list}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\r@ll[#1]{\begin{list}{}{% - \labelwidth = #1 - \leftmargin = \labelwidth - \itemsep = .3ex - \let\makelabel=\rolllabel}% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% -% Typeset the label of a \verb|roll| environment. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\rolllabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep \textbf{#1}\hfill} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \begin{environment}{example} -% We provide an environment for typesetting example code. -% It is typeset in a smaller font with an indentation left and right. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{example}{\begin{quote}\small}{\end{quote}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% -% -% -% -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\par\addcontentsline{\csname - ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}{\protect\numberline{\csname - the#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}}\begingroup - \@parboxrestore - \small - \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par - \endgroup} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsection{Sectioning Commands} -% -% -% The counter \verb|secnumdepth| determines which sectional units -% are decorated with a number. Since we don't want sections and -% everything below to be numbered we set this counter to 0. -% \begin{macrocode} -\setcounter{secnumdepth}{0} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% All but the first article are separated by additional vertical -% space from the preceding text. Thus we define a new boolean -% variable to determine which article is the first one in a chapter. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifFirstArticle -\FirstArticletrue -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\part} -% This definition is used in the author version, where \verb|\part| -% should not be used. An error message is issued instead. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTK@Author@ - \renewcommand\part{% - \typeout{*** Parts can not be used in single articles.}} -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% -% A part is aligned to the next full page. A special page style is -% used on a first page of a part. The macro \verb|\part| has one -% ordinary argument which constitutes the main title of the part. -% This argument can be preceeded by an optional argument---enclosed -% in brackets. This first optional argument is used as the running -% head. If it is missing the main title is used instead. -% -% The main argument can be followed by another optional argument. -% This second optional argument is the subtitle of the part. -% If none is given then the empty default is used instead. -% The second optional argument is an enhancement compared to the -% original definition of parts in \LaTeX. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \renewcommand\part{% - \clearpage - \thispagestyle{part}% - \FirstArticletrue - \Advance@Label@Prefix - \@ifstar{\part@star{chapter}}{\part@star{part}}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\part@star} -% If the next character is a \verb|[| then the part macro has an -% optional argument. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\part@star[1]{% - \@ifnextchar[{\part@optional{#1}}{\part@normal{#1}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\part@optional} -% This macro treats the case that the part macro has an optional -% argument. This optional argument is used in the running head and -% the table of contents. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\part@optional#1[#2]#3{% - \markboth{#2}{#2}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{#2}% - \@ifnextchar[{\part@subtitle{#3}}{\part@nosubtitle{#3}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\part@normal} -% This macro treats the case that the part has no optional -% argument. In this case the title itself is used in the head and -% in the table of contents. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\part@normal[2]{% - \markboth{#2}{#2}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{#2}% - \@ifnextchar[{\part@subtitle{#2}}{\part@nosubtitle{#2}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\part@subtitle} -% This macro treats the case that the part has an optional -% argument for a subtitle. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\part@subtitle#1[#2]{\TopArt{#1}{\\#2}\bigskip\par} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\part@nosubtitle} -% This macro treats the case that the part has no optional -% argument for a subtitle. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\part@nosubtitle[1]{\TopArt{#1}{}\bigskip\par} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\TopArt} -% This macro is used to generate the layout of the beginning of a -% part. It takes two arguments. The first argument is the title of -% the part and the second argument is its subtitle. If the subtitle -% is not empty then it is started by \verb|\\|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\TopArtRule{2pt} -\newcommand\TopArt[2]{% - \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\parskip=0pt\parindent=0pt - \null\vspace{18pt}\par\raggedright\large\sf - {\huge\sf #1}\\[-.5ex]\rule{\textwidth}{\TopArtRule}% - \vspace{2pt} #2 - \end{minipage}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\TopArt[2]{% - \begingroup - \unitlength = 1pt - \@tempcnta = \textwidth - \divide\@tempcnta by \unitlength - \framebox(\@tempcnta,38){\parbox{.95\textwidth}{% - \begin{center}{\large\bf #1}#2 \end{center}}} - \endgroup} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\chapter} -% In the author version of this class no chapters are allowed. They -% are activated when the option \verb|full| is given to the -% class/style. Otherwise an error message is printed. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTK@Author@ - \renewcommand\chapter{% - \typeout{*** Chapters can not be used in single articles.}} -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The appearance of a chapter is the same as the appearance of a -% section. Additionally a line is added to the table of contents -% and the headline is set appropriately. -% -% Since we want to deal with optional arguments and star variants -% things are becoming a little bit more complicated. I don't know -% if it is worth the effort. Maybe nobody will ever use this -% feature anyhow. -% \begin{macrocode} - \renewcommand\chapter{% - \@ifnextchar*{\chapter@star}{% - \@ifnextchar[{\chapter@optional}{\chapter@normal}}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% Ignore any number of stars. Well this may be to harsh but I think -% this is enough. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\chapter@star*{\chapter} -% \end{macrocode} -% Provide a default for the optional argument. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\chapter@normal#1{\chapter@optional[#1]{#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Now do the whole job. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\chapter@optional[#1]{% - \typeout{#1}% - \Advance@Label@Prefix - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}% - \markboth{#1}{#1}% - \FirstArticletrue - \@startsection{chapter}{0}{\z@}{-1ex plus-1ex minus - -.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\ChapterFont}*% - } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\section} -% The section is redefined to use less vertical space than the -% original definition. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{% - -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\SectionFont}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{% - -1ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\SectionFont}} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\subsection} -% The subsection is redefined to use less vertical space than the -% original definition. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{% - -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsectionFont}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{% - -1ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsectionFont}} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection} -% The subsubsection is redefined to use less vertical space than -% the original definition. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{% - -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{% - -1ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\paragraph} -% The paragraph is redefined to use less vertical space than the -% original definition. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{% - 0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{% - 1ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph} -% The subparagraph is redefined to use less vertical space than the -% original definition. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{4}% - {\parindent}{0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{4}% - {\parindent}{1ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{The Article Layout} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\keywords} -% The macro \verb|keywords| is intended for the user to specify -% keywords for the article. It is not used for the article itself -% but for the reprint and the \BibTeX\ file of all articles. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\keywords[1]{\def\DTK@keywords{#1}} -\def\DTK@keywords{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\maketitle} -% The title of an article is typeset together with the author -% information. If it is the first article in this chapter then -% additional vertical space is added. -% -% The title is added to the table of contents and the headline is -% adjusted appropriately. -% -% The macro \verb|\NewpageThreshold| is used to determine how much -% space is needed aon a page to start a new article. If less space -% is left then the next article is started on the next page. -% -% Now we can start to typeset the head of an article and perform -% all tasks required in this situation. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\maketitle{% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% If we are not in a complete journal then we use a different page style -% for the first page. Thus it is possible to use this class to typeset -% preprints and get a better layout of the first page. -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifDTK@Author@ \thispagestyle{part}\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we have to ensure that there is enough space left on this page to -% start a new article. If there isn't enough space we start the article on -% the next page. -% \changes{1.5}{2001/04/25}{Bugfix: constant replaced by macro.} -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifdim\DTKtitle@skip>0pt\vspace{\DTKtitle@skip}\fi - \begingroup - \dimen0=\vsize - \advance\dimen0 by -\pagetotal - \ifdim\dimen0<\NewpageThreshold - \newpage - \global\FirstArticletrue - \fi - \endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The namespace for labels has to be switched. This is done by -% calling the macro \verb|\Advance@Label@Prefix|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \Advance@Label@Prefix -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We encapsulate the title and author information in a minipage to avoid a -% pagebreak in beween (maybe not necessary). Then we draw a line to -% separate the article from the previous one. The line is required if the -% boolean variable \verb|FirstArticle| is true. This variable is set -% afterwards. -% \begin{macrocode} - \begingroup - \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} - \ifFirstArticle - \global\FirstArticlefalse - \vskip 3pt - \else - \DTKtitle@sep - \fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \setcounter{footnote}0 -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now we insert the title and the author. The title is also put into the -% table of contents. The running head is adjusted. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@flushglue=0pt plus .3\textwidth\relax - \raggedright - \TitleFont - \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font\relax - \xspaceskip=\fontdimen7\font\relax - \@title - \ifx\@author\@empty\else - \bigskip\par - \AuthorFont\@author - \fi - \end{minipage}% - \@thanks - \let\thanks\@gobble - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@title}% - \markboth{\@title}{\@title}% - \endgroup -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Finally we rest certain values and insert some space to the beginning of -% the article. -% \begin{macrocode} - \let\@title=\@empty - \let\@author=\@empty - \let\@thanks=\@empty - \setcounter{figure}0 - \setcounter{table}0 - \setcounter{equation}0 -% \setcounter{footnote}0 - \medskip\par} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\DTKtitle@skip} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\DTKtitle@skip{12pt} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\DTKtitle@skip{0pt} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\DTKtitle@sep} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\DTKtitle@sep{\vspace{32pt plus 8pt minus 16pt}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\DTKtitle@sep{\rule{\textwidth}{.4pt}% - \vskip 14pt plus 8pt minus 12pt} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% Several authors are separated by \verb|\and|. Here is a first -% approximation to deal with this case. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\and{, } -% \end{macrocode} -% -% We provide default values for the author, the title and the -% footnote of the title. All of them are empty. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\@title=\@empty -\let\@author=\@empty -\let\@thanks=\@empty -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{environment}{abstract} -% The abstract is typeset in a smaller font indented left and right. -% The use of the quote environment ensures that the abstract can be -% broken at the end of the line. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newenvironment{abstract}{% - \begin{quote}\small - }{% - \end{quote}\medskip\par} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% -% -% \subsection{Numbering} -% -% The numbering is done on a global basis. No chapter numbers are -% prepended. Especially since none are used at all. This is just -% like in the article class. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\thefigure{\arabic{figure}} -\renewcommand\thetable{\arabic{table}} -\renewcommand\theequation{\arabic{equation}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsection{Labels} -% -% Labels have to be used on an per article basis for this purpose -% we use a macro to hold the prefix for the labels. This prefix is -% prepended whenever something is done with the labels. -% -% The prefix is constructed from a numeric counter. This counter is% allocated and initialized. Maybe I could live without this -% counter but this way the labels look nicer (if you ever see them). -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\DTL@label -\DTL@label=0 -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Advance@Label@Prefix} -% This macro is expanded whenever a new module is entered. It has -% to take care that a new and unique prefix string for the labels -% is generated and stored in the macro \verb|\Label@Prefix|. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\Advance@Label@Prefix{% - \advance\DTL@label 1 - \xdef\Label@Prefix{module \the\DTL@label:}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% The label prefix has to be initalized. The easiest way to perform -% this task is touse the macro defined above. -% \begin{macrocode} -\Advance@Label@Prefix -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Sometimes it is desirable to use labels in the old -% sense. I.e. without the module system. For this purpose we keep -% the old definitions of the macros \verb|\ref|, \verb|\label|, and -% \verb|\pageref| under the new names \verb|\Ref|, \verb|\Label|, and -% \verb|\Pageref| respectivly. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\Ref=\ref -\let\Label=\label -\let\Pageref=\pageref -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ref} -% The module prefix is prepended before the original \verb|\ref| -% macros is used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\ref[1]{\Ref{\Label@Prefix:#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\label} -% The module prefix is prepended before the original \verb|\label| -% macros is used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\label[1]{\Label{\Label@Prefix:#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\pageref} -% The module prefix is prepended before the original \verb|\pageref| -% macros is used. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\pageref[1]{\Pageref{\Label@Prefix:#1}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Bibliography} -% -% \begin{macro}{\thebibliography} -% Instead of using a \verb|\chapter*| to start a bibliography we -% use a \verb|\section*|. Thus the bibliography should not appear -% in the table of contents. -% \changes{1.8}{2002/04/01}{typeset raggedright.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\thebibliography[1]{% - \section*{\refname}% - \list{[\arabic{enumi}]}{% - \settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}% - \leftmargin\labelwidth - \advance\leftmargin\labelsep - \usecounter{enumi}} - \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em} - \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000 - \sfcode`\.=1000\relax\DTK@bibliography@rightskip} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\DTK@bibliography@rightskip} -% -% \changes{1.8}{2002/04/01}{macro added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\DTK@bibliography@rightskip{\rightskip=0pt plus 2em} -%</class> -%<*2002> -\newcommand\DTK@bibliography@rightskip{} -%</2002> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\DTK@bibliography} -% This macro is used to overwrite the macro \verb|\bibliography| -% when the complete journal is typeset. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\DTK@bibliography[1]{ - \InputIfFileExists{#1.bbl}{}{\typeout{--- File #1.bbl not found.}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \changes{1.3}{1997/01/28}{Forcing the bibstyle.} -% We switch to the default bib style. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\bibliographystyle{dtk} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsection{Footnotes} -% -% This is just my personal taste. I have incorporated my -% fnblock.sty. This style option arranges things in a way that -% footnotes do not go beneath the footnotemarks. In addition they -% can be indented at the right side. -% -% Both indentation at both sides can be configured with the -% following two macros: -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\DTK@fnrightmargin{0em} -\newcommand\DTK@fnleftmargin{1em} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext} -% And now we make the footnote to behave as desired. -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{Don't let footnote line and footnote -% text be broken across pages. Fix problem with footnotemarks.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\long\def\@makefntext#1{% - \@nobreaktrue - \begin{list}{}{% - \rightmargin=0pt% - \parsep=0.333\baselineskip plus 2pt - \leftmargin=\DTK@fnleftmargin} - \item\mbox{}% - \llap{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}\kern1pt}% - #1% - \end{list}} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\noindent - \hbox to 1.8em{\hss$\m@th^{\@thefnmark}$}#1} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\@textsuperscript} -% Define \verb|\@textsuperscript| for older LaTeX(2e) versions. -% The macros has been copied from ``latex.ltx'' <1999/12/01>. -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{Macro introduced to fix problems with -% footnotes in minipages.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\@ifundefined{@textsuperscript}{% - \def\@textsuperscript#1{% - {\m@th\ensuremath{^{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@#1}}}}} -}{} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\footnoterule} -% The rule separating main text and footnotes is defined. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\footnoterule{% - \kern-3\p@ - \hrule\@width0.333\columnwidth - \kern2.6\p@} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\footnoterule{\kern-3\p@ - \hrule width .4\columnwidth - \kern 2.6\p@} -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Defining Page Styles} -% -% \subsubsection{The Page Style ``plain''} -% -% The page style plain provides a head line and a foot line. The -% page number is printed in the outer corner of the head line. The -% inner part of the head line contains the title of the current -% article. -% -% The foot line contains the name and number of the current journal -% flushed towards the inner border of the page. -% -% The head line and the footline are separated by a bar from the -% main body of text. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\ps@plain{% - \let\@mkboth=\@gobbletwo - \let\chaptermark=\@gobble - \let\sectionmark=\@gobble - \let\subsectionmark=\@gobble - \def\@oddhead{\vbox{\hbox to \textwidth{% - \let\\=\relax - \HeadFont \rightmark \hfil\PagenoFont\thepage}\kern 3pt - \ifdim\HeadRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\HeadRuleDepth\fi}}% - \def\@evenhead{\vbox{\hbox to \textwidth{% - \let\\=\relax - \PagenoFont \thepage\hfil\HeadFont \leftmark}\kern 3pt - \ifdim\HeadRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\HeadRuleDepth\fi}}% -\iffalse% RN 2005-01-17 - \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\FootFont \footmark\hfil\null}}}% - \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\null\hfil\FootFont \footmark}}}% -\else - \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{% - \FootFont \footmark\hfil\DTK@corr@version\null}}}% - \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{% - \null\FootFont\DTK@corr@version\hfil \footmark}}}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsubsection{The Page Style ``headings''} -% -% The page style headings is an alias to the page style plain. -% \changes{1.4}{2000/09/05}{definition for pagestyle headings added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\ps@headings\ps@plain -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsubsection{The Page Style ``part''} -% -% The page style \verb|part| contains the same foot as the page style -% \verb|plain|. The head line is empty. -% -% This style is used when a new part is started. It can be -% configured by redefining the macros \verb|FootRuleDepth|, -% \verb|\FootFont|, and \verb|\PagenoFont|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\ps@part{% - \let\@mkboth=\@gobbletwo - \let\chaptermark=\@gobble - \let\sectionmark=\@gobble - \let\subsectionmark=\@gobble - \let\@oddhead=\@empty - \let\@evenhead=\@empty -\iffalse% RN 2005-01-17 - \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\FootFont \footmark\hfil\null}}}% - \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\null\hfil\FootFont \footmark}}}% -\else - \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{% - \FootFont \footmark\hfil\DTK@corr@version\null}}}% - \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{% - \null\FootFont \DTK@corr@version\hfil\footmark}}}% -\fi -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The default page style is plain. This has been set by the book -% style before. If we want our changes to take effect we have to -% reinitialize the page style. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\pagestyle{plain} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% -% \subsection{The Layout of the Titlepage} -% -% \begin{macro}{\DieTeXnischeKomoedie} -% This macro produces the title page. It has three arguments. The -% first argument is the number of the volume. This value is also -% stored in the macro \verb|\volume| for later use. The second -% argument is the number of the year and the third argument is the -% date when this volume is released. The date is given as month and -% year. -% -% The appearance of the cover page is determined by the macro -% \verb|\CoverArt|. This can be redefined to get a different cover -% page. -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTK@Author@ - \AtEndOfClass{%\show\DTK@jobname - \InputIfFileExists{\DTK@jobname.inf}{% - \renewcommand\volume{\Volume}}{}}% -\else - \newcommand\DieTeXnischeKomoedie[3]{% - \thispagestyle{empty}% - \gdef\Volume{#1}% - \xdef\volume{\Volume}%??? - \gdef\DTKedition{#2}% - \gdef\DTKdate{#3}% - \immediate\openout\@unused \jobname.inf\relax - \immediate\write\@unused{% - \string\gdef\string\Volume{#1}^^J% - \string\gdef\string\DTKedition{#2}^^J% - \string\gdef\string\DTKdate{#3}% - }% - \immediate\closeout\@unused - \iffalse% RN 2005-02-20; unnoetig, da localer \jobname usw. - \global\let\bibliography=\DTK@bibliography - \global\let\bibliographystyle=\@gobble - \fi - \CoverArt{#1}{#2}{#3}% - \newpage} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\CoverArt} -% -% This macro implements the layout of the cover page of -% DTK. It can be redefined to get a different layout. -% -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{Special effects via the packages -% graphicx and color instead of PostScript specials.} -% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/02}{Correction of the size of the number on -% the title page for volumes after 1999.} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999> -\newfont\CoverTitleFont{cmr17 scaled \magstep 5} -\newfont\CoverNumberFont{cmr17 scaled 3583} -%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999> -\newcommand\CoverArt[3]{% - \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined - \newfont\CoverTitleFont{ecrm1700 scaled \magstep 5} - \fi - \ifx\CoverNumberFont\@undefined - \newfont\CoverNumberFont{ecrm1700 scaled 2986} - \fi - \vspace*{-34pt}\hfill - \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to \textheight{\null\hfill\CoverTitleFont - \journalname\hfill\null}% - \@tempdimb=\ht\@tempboxa - \advance\@tempdimb by\dp\@tempboxa - \hbox to\@tempdimb{% - \vbox to\wd\@tempboxa{% - \vskip\wd\@tempboxa - \vss\rotatebox{90}{\box\@tempboxa}}\hss} \ % - \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight} - \begin{minipage}[b]{.7\textwidth}\raggedright - \rule{1em}{0pt}% - \dimen2=\textwidth\advance\dimen2-1em - \parbox{\dimen2}{\CoverArt@font - DANTE\\ - Deutschsprachige\\ - Anwendervereinigung - \TeX\ \eV}\\[1ex] - \dimen3=\textwidth\advance\dimen3-\CoverArt@gap - \hfill\rule{\dimen3}{\CoverArt@linewidth}% - \\[-\baselineskip]\null\hspace{1em}% - {\CoverArt@small\cover@sub{#1}{#2}{#3}}% - \\[-\baselineskip]\rule{0pt}{.617647\textheight}% - \CoverNumberFont - \null\hfill - \makebox(0,0)[br]{% - \textcolor{CoverArt@grey}{% - \CoverArt@strip@no #1;\hspace{1pt}% - }}% - \end{minipage}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{cover@sub} -% Internal macro for typesetting the volume information on the -% cover--front and back matter. -% \changes{1.7}{2001/31/12}{Extracted to allow configuration for -% "`Die \TeX nichen Kontakte"'} -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\cover@sub[3]{% - #2. Jahrgang\quad Heft #1\quad #3% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{CoverArt@grey} -% Define the color for the number on the cover. -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{Color definition via color.sty} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTK@Author@\else - \definecolor{CoverArt@grey}{gray}{.8} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\CoverArt@strip@no} -% Extract the relevant part from the number of the issue. -% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/02}{Correction of the macro to deal with -% four digit numbers instead of striping two digits. This is used -% since the year 2000.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\CoverArt@strip@no#1/#2;{#1\raisebox{0.35ex}{\CoverTitleFont/}#2} -%<*1995|1996|1997|1998|1999> -\def\CoverArt@strip@no#1/#2#3#4#5;{% - #1\raisebox{0.35ex}{\CoverTitleFont/}#4#5} -%</1995|1996|1997|1998|1999> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\CoverArt@linewidth} -% -% This macro determines the thickness of the horizontal rule -% separating the publisher from the edition information. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\CoverArt@linewidth{0pt}%{1.2pt} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\CoverArt@barwidth} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\CoverArt@barwidth{2.41pt} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\CoverArt@font} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\CoverArt@font{\Large\raggedleft} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\CoverArt@small} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\CoverArt@small{\footnotesize} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\CoverArt@gap} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\CoverArt@gap{2em} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsubsection{Redefinitions} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\renewcommand\CoverArt[3]{ - \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined - \newfont\CoverTitleFont{cmr17 scaled \magstep 5}% - \fi - \begin{center} - {\LARGE DANTE\\[14pt] - \Large Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX\ \eV}% - \\\rule{\textwidth}{2pt}\par\vfill - \CoverTitleFont Die - \\[22pt] \TeX nische - \\[22pt] Kom{\"o}die - \par\vfill\rule{\textwidth}{2pt}\\[4pt]\large - Heft #1\hfill #2.\ Jahrgang\hfill #3 - \normalsize - \end{center}\vspace*{28.5pt}} -%</1995> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Special code for 2007 layout} -% -% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/01/15}{Class option for 2005 added. (RN)} -% By now, the material is inserted all in one huge chunk. -% Some parts of this material probably should be moved to other places -% in the DTX file, where they belong.\\ -% \mbox{(HjG 2005-02-04)} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*2007|2008> - -\ProvidesFile{dtk07.clo} - [2007/08/28 v0.1 dtk class option (hv)] - -\renewcommand\CoverArt[3]{% - \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined - %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{ecrm1700 scaled \magstep 5} - %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{lmr12 scaled 2938} - \DeclareFixedFont\CoverTitleFont{\encodingdefault}{\rmdefault}{m}{n}{41.26}% - \fi - \ifx\CoverNumberFont\@undefined - %\newfont\CoverNumberFont{ecrm1700 scaled 2986} - \DeclareFixedFont\CoverNumberFont{\encodingdefault}{\rmdefault}{m}{n}{51.66}% - \fi - \vspace*{-34pt}\hfill - \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to \textheight{\null\hfill\CoverTitleFont - Die \journalname\hfill\null}% - \@tempdimb=\ht\@tempboxa - \advance\@tempdimb by\dp\@tempboxa - \hbox to\@tempdimb{% - \vbox to\wd\@tempboxa{% - \vskip\wd\@tempboxa - \vss\rotatebox{90}{\box\@tempboxa}}\hss} \ - \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight} - \begin{minipage}[b]{.7\textwidth}\raggedright - \rule{1em}{0pt}% - \dimen2=\textwidth\advance\dimen2-1em - \parbox{\dimen2}{\CoverArt@font - {\Huge\DANTE}\\ - Deutschsprachige\\ - Anwendervereinigung - \TeX\ \eV}\\[1ex] - \dimen3=\textwidth\advance\dimen3-\CoverArt@gap - \hfill\rule{\dimen3}{\CoverArt@linewidth}% - \\[-\baselineskip]\null\hspace{1em}% - {\CoverArt@small\cover@sub{#1}{#2}{#3}}% - \\[-\baselineskip]\rule{0pt}{.617647\textheight}% - \CoverNumberFont - \null\hfill - \makebox(0,0)[br]{% - \textcolor{CoverArt@grey}{% - \CoverArt@strip@no #1;\hspace{1pt}% - }}% Warum verwendet `\CoverArt@strip@no' \CoverTitleFont? RN - \end{minipage}% -} - -\PassOptionsToPackage{ngerman}{babel} -\RequirePackage{babel} -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"`}{\frqq}% -\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"'}{\flqq}% -%\def@dqmacro{`}{\frqq}{\frqq} -%\def@dqmacro{'}{\flqq}{\flqq} -% -\RequirePackage{showexpl} -\lstset{language=[LaTeX]TeX} -\providecommand\lstverb{% - \leavevmode\bgroup % - \def\lst@boxpos{b}% - \lsthk@PreSet\lstset{flexiblecolumns,basicstyle=\mdseries\ttfamily\normalsize,backgroundcolor={}, - breaklines=false,keywordstyle=\mdseries\ttfamily\normalsize}% - \lsthk@TextStyle - \@ifnextchar\bgroup{\afterassignment\lst@InlineG \let\@let@token}% - \lstinline@} -\providecommand*{\ctanurl}[1]{% - \href{ftp://ftp.ctan.org/tex-archive/#1}{\nolinkurl{CTAN:#1}}% -} -% -%\endinput -%</2007|2008> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \subsection{List of Addresses} -% -% Addresses can be given anywhere throughout the whole -% document. The address together with the page where it has been -% given is stored in the index. -% -% The list of addresses is handled by the index mechanism of -% \LaTeX. I (safely) assume that nobody has the desire to make an -% index for a journal. -% -% \begin{macro}{\address} -% The address macro takes three arguments. The first argument is the -% first name the second is the last name and the third is the -% address where several lines can be included which are separated -% by \verb|\\|. -% -% The macro can be e.g. as follows:\\ -% \verb|\address{Gerd}{Neugebauer}%|\\ -% \verb| {Mainzer Str. 8\\56321 Rhens}| -% -% -% The address is given to \verb|\index| to be stored in the .idx -% file. This file is sorted and reformatted to produce the sorted -% list of addresses. -% -% The problem was to get the correct (German) ordering. For this -% purpose the \TeX{} macros which are (normally) part of a name -% have to be expanded properly. Unfortunately plain expansion may -% leave braces which confuse makeindex. To get rid of these braces -% we have to scan the tokens and transfer those tokens that are not -% braces. -% -% We use one big assumption. We assume that a name does not contain -% a dollar sign. Well, it is rather unusual that mathematics is -% part of a name. -% -% The better solution would be a future version of makeindex which -% is able to cope with those problems (wait and pray:-) -% \changes{1.5}{2001/06/05}{Some magic for doublequote} -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*class> -\chardef\DTK@cat=\the\catcode`\" -\catcode`\"=13 -\newcommand\address[3]{% - \begingroup - \def\"##1{\@ifundefined{detex@@##1}{##1}% - {\csname detex@@##1\endcsname}}% - \ifcat a\noexpand"\else\let"=\"\fi - \def\ss{ss}% - \let\'=\relax - \let\`=\relax - \let\^=\relax - \let\.=\relax - \let\==\relax - \let\d=\relax - \let\b=\relax - \let\c=\relax - \let\v=\relax - \let\H=\relax - \let\t=\relax - \let\u=\relax - \let\~=\relax - \def\o{o}% - \def\O{O}% - \def\aa{aa}% - \def\AA{Aa}% - \def\l{l}% - \def\L{L}% - \def\ae{ae}% - \def\AE{Ae}% - \def\oe{oe}% - \def\OE{Oe}% - \def\TeX{TeX}% - \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% - \def\LaTeXe{LaTeX2e}% - \let\null=\relax - \xdef\@ddress{#2, #1}% - \endgroup - \begingroup - \def\\{\string\\}% - \ifcat a\noexpand"\else\def\"{\string"}\fi - \def"{\string"}% - \def\null{}% - \expandafter\@strip\@ddress$%$ - \iffalse% RN 2005-01-15 - \index{\STRIP@*#1 #2!#3}% - \else - \glossary{\STRIP@*#1 #2!#3}% - \fi - \endgroup -} -\catcode`\"=\DTK@cat -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% For the removing of \TeX\ macros in addresses we need some -% definitions to perform the mapping. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\strip@grp={ -\let\strip@end=$%$ -\def\@strip{\def\STRIP@{}\strip@I} -\def\strip@I{\let\strip@next=\strip@I - \futurelet\strip@CHAR\strip@II} -\def\strip@II#1{% - \ifx\strip@CHAR\strip@end - \let\strip@next=\relax - \else\ifx\strip@CHAR\strip@grp - \strip@I #1$%$ - \let\strip@next=\strip@I - \else\ifcat\strip@CHAR A - \xdef\STRIP@{\STRIP@#1}% - \else\ifcat\strip@CHAR. - \xdef\STRIP@{\STRIP@#1}% - \else\ifcat\strip@CHAR\space - \xdef\STRIP@{\STRIP@ #1}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \strip@next} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\detex@@a{ae} -\def\detex@@o{oe} -\def\detex@@u{ue} -\def\detex@@A{Ae} -\def\detex@@O{Oe} -\def\detex@@U{Ue} -\def\detex@@s{ss} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{environment}{theaddresses} -% The addresses are collected in an environment Addresses. This -% environment is used to customize the layout of this list. -% \changes{1.5}{2001/04/08}{raggedright added.} -% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/03}{boxing of address items and raggedbottom added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTK@Author@\else -\newenvironment{theaddresses}{% - \chapter{\addressname}\Label{addresses} - \begingroup - \columnsep=10pt - \addresssize - \def\addressitem##1##2##3{% - \par - \parbox{\columnwidth}{ - \textbf{##1}\hfill[\ignorespaces ##3]% - \\ ##2}} - \begin{multicols}{2}% - \raggedbottom - \raggedright -}{% - \end{multicols}% - \endgroup - } -\fi -\newcommand\addresssize{\footnotesize\parskip=6pt plus 2pt minus 3pt} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For older issues another definition has been used. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995|1996> -\let\addresssize\relax -%</1995|1996> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{environment} -% -% \begin{macro}{\listofaddresses} -% This macro reads the index file which is assumed to contain the -% properly formatted list of authors. If this file does not exist -% then a warning is printed. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTK@Author@ - \newcommand\listofaddresses{% - \typeout{*** listofaddresses not supported in articles.}} - \let\makeaddresses\relax% RN 2005-01-15 -\else - \iffalse% RN 2005-01-15 - \newcommand\listofaddresses{% - \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.ind}{}{% - \typeout{No file \jobname.ind.}% - \typeout{Use the following command to create it:\space\space - makeindex -s dtk.ist \jobname}% - \typeout{\space}}% - } - \else - \newcommand\listofaddresses{% - \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.gls}{}{% - \typeout{No file \jobname.gls.}% - \typeout{Use the following command to create it:^^J% - \@spaces makeindex -s dtk.ist -o \jobname.gls \jobname.glo}% - \typeout{\space}}% - } - \let\makeaddresses\makeglossary - \fi -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{The Table of Contents} -% -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% The table of contents should appear as a page of it's own. It -% should have an appropriate headline if it is long -% enough. Otherwise the first page has no headline and no page -% number. -% -% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents} -% This macro produces the table of contents. It is not availlable -% for single articles -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifDTK@Author@ - \renewcommand\tableofcontents{% - \typeout{*** tabelofcontents not supported in articles.}} -\else - \renewcommand\tableofcontents{% - \clearpage - \thispagestyle{empty}% - \markboth{\contentsname}{\contentsname}% - \ContentsArt - \begingroup - \parskip=\ContentsParSkip - \let\\=\relax - \TOC@configure - \@starttoc{toc} - \endgroup - } -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\TOC@configure} -% This macro can be used to redefine properties of the table of -% contents. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\TOC@configure\relax -%</class> -%<*1997|1998|1999> -\def\TOC@configure{\renewcommand{\bfdefault}{bdx}} -%</1997|1998|1999> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ContentsArt} -% This macro is used to typeset the head of the table of contents. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\ContentsArt{% - \vspace*{-\headheight}\vspace*{-\headsep}\vspace*{-2pt} - \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} - \Huge \journalname\\[2pt]% - \rule{\textwidth}{2pt}\\[2pt]% - \null\hfill - \CoverArt@small - \cover@sub{\volume}{\DTKedition}{\DTKdate} - \end{minipage}\vspace{16pt minus 8pt}\par -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995> -\ifDTK@Author@\else - \renewcommand\ContentsArt{\part@nosubtitle{\contentsname}} -\fi -%</1995> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bdx}{n} - {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12> - <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88> ecrb10 - }{} -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{bdx}{n} - {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12> - <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88> cmbdx10 - }{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The lines contained in the table of contents are determined by -% the counter \verb|tocdepth|. The counter defines a level above -% which the lines are suppressed in the table of contents. -% -% We are only interested in chapters and parts. Chapters have level -% 0 and parts have level -1. Thus we set \verb|tocdepth| to 0. -% \begin{macrocode} -\setcounter{tocdepth}{0} -% \end{macrocode} -% The layout of the lines in the table of contents is determined by -% the macros \verb|\l@|{\em type}. Some of them are redefined next. -% -% \begin{macro}{\l@part} -% This macro determines the layout of the line in the table of -% contents for parts. It simply imitates the layout of chapters -% without additional space. -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{Definition modified.} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\l@part[2]{% - \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}% - \addvspace{0.5em plus 0pt}% space above part line - \@tempdima 1.5em - \begingroup - \bf - \advance\leftskip\@tempdima - \hskip -\leftskip - #1\par - \penalty\@highpenalty - \endgroup - \addvspace{0.2em}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For older issues another definition has been used. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995|1996> -\renewcommand\l@part[2]{% - \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}% - \addvspace{0.5em plus 0pt}% space above part line - \@tempdima 1.5em - \begingroup - \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth - \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth - \bf - \leavevmode - \advance\leftskip\@tempdima - \hskip -\leftskip - #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par - \penalty\@highpenalty - \endgroup} -%</1995|1996> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter} -% This macro determines the layout of the line in the table of -% contents for chapters. It simply imitates the layout of -% sections. -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{Definition modified.} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\l@chapter[2]{% - \begingroup - \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@ - \@afterindenttrue - \interlinepenalty\@M - \@tempdima 1.5em\relax % number width - \@tempdimb 2.5em\relax % indent - \advance\leftskip \@tempdimb - \advance\rightskip \@tempdimb -% \advance\leftskip \@tempdima - \noindent\hskip -\leftskip -% \hbox to\@tempdimb{\hbox to\@tempdima{\hss #2}\hss}% - \hbox to\@tempdimb{#2\hss}% - #1\par - \endgroup} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For older issues another definition has been used. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*1995|1996> -\renewcommand\l@chapter{\@dottedtocline{0}{1.5em}{2.3em}} -%</1995|1996> -%<*class> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% For backward compatibility modes we have defined class options. -% If an old layout is requested via a class option then we have to -% load now the appropriate class option file. -% \begin{macrocode} -\iffalse% RN 2005-01-15 -\@ifundefined{DTK@layout}{}{\input dtk\DTK@layout.clo} -\else -\@ifundefined{DTK@layout}{}{\input{dtk\DTK@layout.clo}} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% ??? New stuff !!! -% \begin{macrocode} -% RN 2005-01-15 -\IfFileExists{eurosans.sty} -% Reicht eigentlich nicht; die Fonts selbst müssen auch -% vorhanden sein... -{% - \RequirePackage{eurosans} -% ==> http://home.vr-web.de/was/x/latexeuro.pdf -% ==> ftp://ftp.adobe.com/pub/adobe/type/win/all/eurofont.exe -% (unzip eurofont.exe...) -% RN 2005-02-12 - %%%\AtBeginDocument{\let\texteuro\euro} - \AtBeginDocument{% - \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texteuro}{\euro}}% ??? -} -{% - % Das kann jeder. - \let\DTK@texteuro\texteuro - \AtBeginDocument{% - \renewcommand*\texteuro{\textsf{\DTK@texteuro}}} -} -% From: `graphics.cfg' -% Send papersize information to the output driver -\begingroup - \chardef\x=0 % - % check pdfTeX - \@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{}{% - \ifcase\pdfoutput - \else - \chardef\x=1 % - \fi - }% - % check VTeX - \@ifundefined{OpMode}{}{% - \chardef\x=2 % - }% -\expandafter\endgroup -\ifcase\x - % default case - \AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\the\paperwidth,\the\paperheight}}% -\or - % pdfTeX is running in pdf mode - \pdfpagewidth\paperwidth\pdfpageheight\paperheight -\else - % VTeX is running - \mediawidth\paperwidth\mediaheight\paperheight -\fi - -% RN 2005-01-15 -% Solange die lmodern-Schreibmaschinenschrift fehlerhaft ist -% (nicht "monospaced"), nehmen wird das EC-Äquivalent. RN -\AtBeginDocument{% - \begingroup% vielleicht noch intelligenter... - \ttfamily - \@tempdima\fontdimen3\font - \advance\@tempdima\fontdimen4\font - \ifdim\@tempdima>\z@ - \edef\@tempa{\ttdefault}\gdef\ttdefault{cmtt}% - \ClassWarning{dtk}{% - Font `\@tempa' is bad, changed to '\ttdefault'}% - \fi - \endgroup -} -% RN 2005-01-22 -\RequirePackage{makeidx} -% RN 2005-01-22 -% Muss evtl. noch verbessert werden? -\renewenvironment{theindex} - {\begin{multicols}{2}[\section{\indexname}\vspace{-.5\baselineskip}]% - \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax - \columnseprule \z@ - \columnsep=10pt - \raggedbottom\raggedright - \let\item\@idxitem} - {\end{multicols}} -\renewcommand\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@} -\renewcommand\subitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{20\p@}} -\renewcommand\subsubitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{30\p@}} -%\renewcommand\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax} -\renewcommand\indexspace{\par \vskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus1\p@\relax} - -% 2005-02-11 -\newcommand*\DTK@embedded@documentclasshook{} -\newcommand*\AtEmbeddedDocumentclass{% - \g@addto@macro\DTK@embedded@documentclasshook} -\AtEmbeddedDocumentclass{% -%%% \filename@parse{\protect#1}\edef\DTK@local@jobname{\filename@base}%??? -% \filename@parse{\DTK@local@jobname}% -% \edef\DTK@local@jobname{\filename@base}% - \edef\jobname{\DTK@local@jobname}% -} -%\show\DTK@embedded@documentclasshook -\newcommand*\DTK@embedded@begindocumenthook{} -\newcommand*\AtEmbeddedBeginDocument{% - \g@addto@macro\DTK@embedded@begindocumenthook} -\AtEmbeddedBeginDocument{} -\newcommand*\DTK@embedded@enddocumenthook{} -\newcommand*\AtEmbeddedEndDocument{% - \g@addto@macro\DTK@embedded@enddocumenthook} -\AtEmbeddedEndDocument{\endinput} -% RN 2005-01-22 -\newcommand*\DTK@jobname{} -\ifDTK@Author@ - \edef\DTK@jobname{komoedie} -\else - \edef\DTK@jobname{\jobname} -\fi -\newcommand*\DTK@local@jobname{} -\newcommand*\DTK@local@inputname{} -%%%\newcommand*\DTK@PSforPDF{} -\newcommand*\DTK@eat@version[1][]{\ignorespaces} -% Wie `\input', lädt aber auch komplette Dokumente. RN -\newcommand*\DTK@usepackage{} -\newcommand*\DTKinput[1]{% - \begingroup -% RN/HjG 2005-03-23 - \filename@parse{#1}% - \edef\DTK@local@jobname{\filename@base}% - \@ifundefined{filename@ext}% - {\IfFileExists{\DTK@local@jobname.ltx}% - {\edef\DTK@local@inputname{\DTK@local@jobname.ltx}}% - {\edef\DTK@local@inputname{\DTK@local@jobname.tex}}% - }% - {\edef\DTK@local@inputname{#1}}% - \renewcommand*\documentclass[2][]{% - %%\edef\jobname{\DTK@local@jobname}% - %%%\let\DTK@PSforPDF\PSforPDF - %\renewcommand\PSforPDF[2][]{}% - %%%\let\PSforPDF\@gobble - \DTK@embedded@documentclasshook - \DTK@eat@version}% - \renewcommand*\usepackage[2][]{% - \@ifnextchar[%] - {\DTK@usepackage{##1}{##2}}% - {\DTK@usepackage{##1}{##2}[]}% - }% - \def\DTK@usepackage##1##2[##3]{% - \edef\@tempb{\zap@space##2 \@empty}% - \@for\@tempa:=\@tempb\do{\def\@tempb{inputenc}% - \ifx\@tempa\@tempb - \edef\@tempa{##1}% - \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else\inputencoding{##1}\fi - \else - \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else\NeedPackage{\@tempa}% - \RecordPackage{##1}\@tempa{##3}\DTK@local@inputname - \fi - \fi}}% - \let\pagestyle\@gobble - \let\thispagestyle\@gobble - \let\nocite\@gobble - \let\listfiles\relax - \let\nofiles\relax - \renewcommand*\AtBeginDocument[1]{% - \typeout{\string\AtBeginDocument\space ignored!}} - \renewcommand*\AtEndDocument[1]{% - \typeout{\string\AtEndDocument\space ignored!}} - \renewenvironment*{document}% - %%%{\let\PSforPDF\DTK@PSforPDF}% - %%%{\endinput}% - {\DTK@embedded@begindocumenthook}% - {\DTK@embedded@enddocumenthook}% -% RN 2005-02-19, now moved! -% \filename@parse{#1}% -% \@ifundefined{filename@ext}% -% {\InputIfFileExists{#1.ltx}{}{\input{#1}}}{\input{#1}}% - \input{\DTK@local@inputname}% -% end - \endgroup -} -%%%\RequirePackage[final]{ps4pdf} -\@ifdefinable\User@Packages{\newwrite\User@Packages} -\AtBeginDocument{% - %%%\edef\DTK@jobname{\jobname}% - %%%\edef\PfP@container{\DTK@jobname-pics.pdf}% - \ifDTK@Author@\else - \listfiles - \InputIfFileExists{userpackages.tex}% - {\typeout{*************************************^^J% - * File `userpackages.tex' used.^^J% - *************************************}% - \newcommand*\RecordPackage[4]{}% - % warum gibt es kein \@gobblethree? ist jetzt egal! - }% - {% - \immediate\openout\User@Packages userpackages.tex\relax - \begingroup \catcode`\~=\active \let~=\space - \immediate\write\User@Packages{% - \@percentchar\space userpackages.tex^^J% - \@percentchar\space generated by `\jobname'^^J% - \@percentchar\space \DTK@today}% - \endgroup - \AtEndDocument{% - \immediate\closeout\User@Packages\relax}% - \newcommand*\RecordPackage[4]{% - \immediate\write\User@Packages{% - \string\usepackage[##1]{##2}[##3] % - \@percentchar\space From file: ##4}}% - }% - \fi - % RN 2005-03-21 - \@ifpackageloaded{lineno}{% - \ifDTK@Draft@\else - \nolinenumbers - \fi - }{} -} -% RN 2005-01-22 -\def\indexname{Stichwortverzeichnis}% Besser woanders? -% RN 2005-01-23 -\def\printindex{% - \InputIfFileExists{\DTK@jobname.ind}{}{% - \typeout{No file \DTK@jobname.ind.}% - \typeout{Use the following command to create it:^^J% - \@spaces makeindex -s dtk-idx.ist -o \DTK@jobname.ind \DTK@jobname.idx}% - \typeout{\space}}% -} -% RN 2005-01-22 -\@fptop\z@ - -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now the class is complete. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</class> -%<*logos> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \section{The Package dtklogos} -% -% This section contains some useful abbreviations. They are mainly -% some kind of logos. -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/27}{Logos moved to a separate package.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvidesPackage{dtklogos}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space gene] -% \end{macrocode} -% -% First we have to determine which kind of \LaTeX{} is running. We use -% the existence of the macro \verb|\documentclass| to see if we have a -% \LaTeXe. This macro should not be defined in \LaTeX\,2.09. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifOldLaTeX -\@ifundefined{documentclass}{\OldLaTeXtrue}{\OldLaTeXfalse} -% \end{macrocode} -% The following hack is from Bernd Raichle. -% -% For \LaTeX\,2.09 (with or without NFSS) we need something like -% the \verb|\smaller| from the obsolete ``smaller.sty'' to emulate -% SmallCaps for (nearly) all types of fonts. For SmallCaps it is -% required to reduce further than for \verb|\smaller|. Thus we make -% a new definition for \verb|\logo@smaller| which is oriented at -% the ``math sizes'' (here: \verb|\scriptfont<fam>|) which is -% defined in \LaTeXe. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifOldLaTeX -\expandafter\ifx\csname selectfont\endcsname\relax -% \end{macrocode} -% -% For OFSS a hack is needed to switch back to Family/Series/Shape. -% For this purpose we ``abuse'' the ``math group/fam'' which is -% changed similar to the macros from the file ``lfonts.tex''. -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcommand{\logo@sm@ller}{\relax - \expandafter\logo@sm@ll@r\expandafter{\the\fam}} - \newcommand{\logo@sm@ll@r}[1]{% - % \ifx\@currsize\tiny \tiny\fi - \ifx\@currsize\scriptsize \tiny\fi - \ifx\@currsize\footnotesize \tiny\fi - \ifx\@currsize\small \scriptsize\fi - \ifx\@currsize\normalsize \scriptsize\fi - \ifx\@currsize\large \footnotesize\fi - \ifx\@currsize\Large \normalsize\fi - \ifx\@currsize\LARGE \large\fi - \ifx\@currsize\huge \Large\fi - \ifx\@currsize\Huge \huge\fi - \ifcase#1\relax\rm\or\mit\or\cal\or\tenex % not sure about the tenex - \or\it\or\sl\or\bf\or\tt\or\sf\or\sc\or\ly\fi} -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% -% With NFSS (for \LaTeX\,2.09) we can change the size indepenently -% from the other font properties. Thus things are easier. -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcommand{\logo@sm@ller}{% - \relax\@nomath\logo@smaller - \ifx\f@size\@vpt \else - \ifx\f@size\@vipt \fontsize\@vpt{6pt}\fi - \ifx\f@size\@viipt \fontsize\@vpt{6pt}\fi - \ifx\f@size\@viiipt \fontsize\@vipt{7pt}\fi - \ifx\f@size\@ixpt \fontsize\@vipt{7pt}\fi - \ifx\f@size\@xpt \fontsize\@viipt{8pt}\fi - \ifx\f@size\@xipt \fontsize\@viiipt{9.5pt}\fi - \ifx\f@size\@xiipt \fontsize\@viiipt{9.5pt}\fi - \ifx\f@size\@xivpt \fontsize\@xpt{12pt}\fi - \ifx\f@size\@xviipt \fontsize\@xiipt{14pt}\fi - \ifx\f@size\@xxpt \fontsize\@xivpt{18pt}\fi - \ifx\f@size\@xxvpt \fontsize\@xxpt{25pt}\fi - \selectfont - \fi} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The first versions of NFSS have used the macro name \verb|\size| -% instead of \verb|\fontsize|. -% \begin{macrocode} - \@ifundefined{fontsize}{\let\fontsize=\size}{} -\fi -\newcommand{\logo@smaller}{\protect\logo@sm@ller} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \subsection{Macros from texnames.sty} -% -% The following macros are taken from the file {\tt texnames.sty} -% version \verb|1.09| from \verb|<16 March 1993>| by Nelson -% H.\,F.~Beebe. I have simply included the definitions here to avoid -% additional files to be distributed with dtk.dtx. The original -% documentation has been wrapped into the doc format. And here it goes: -% -% In the following, we first give the ``official'' definition, -% then follow it with spelling variants. Alternate definitions -% are discarded in favor of the official one. Each family is -% separated by a line like the following one. -% -% \begin{macro}{\TeX} -% Only change from plain.tex is the \verb|\spacefactor| assignment -% (suggested by Phil Taylor), so that \TeX\ at the end of a -% sentence isn't treated as an abbreviation. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\TeX{T\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX% - \spacefactor1000 } -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\AmS} -% From the AMS tex/ams/amslatex/fontsel/nfssinst.tex file: -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\AmS{% - \(\cal A\)\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox - {\(\cal M\)}\kern-.125em{\(\cal S\)}} -\providecommand\AMS{\AmS} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\XeTeX} -% The new TeX\ program -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand{\XeTeX}{X\kern-.1em\lower.5ex\hbox{\reflectbox{E}}\kern-.15em\TeX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\AmSLaTeX} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\AmSLaTeX{\AmS-\LaTeX} -\providecommand\AMSLaTeX{\AmSLaTeX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\AmSTeX} -% Mike Spivak's amstex/amstex.tex 1.1d [26-Aug-1988] has\\ -% \verb|\def\AmSTeX{{\textfontii A}\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox|\\ -% \verb| {\textfontii M}\kern-.125em{\textfontii S}-\TeX}|\\ -% and 2.1 [05-Apr-1991] has an equivalent definition. -% AmSTeX's \verb|\textfontii| is exactly the same as \verb|\cal|, which -% all \TeX variants understand. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\AmSTeX{% - $\cal A$\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{$\cal M$}% - \kern-.125em$\cal S$-\TeX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\AMSTEX} -% Leslie Lamport's latex/tmanual.tex [10-Jul-1984] (an early -% draft of the book) defines it in uppercase with the standard -% definition. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\AMSTEX{\AmSTeX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\AMSTEX} -% Barbara Beeton's latex/deproc.sty [24-Apr-1986] and inputs/tugbot.sty -% [11-Jan-1988] uses this spelling, but the definition\\ -% \verb|\leavevmode\hbox{$\cal A\kern-.2em\lower.376ex \hbox{$\cal|\\ -% \verb|M$}\kern-.2em\cal S$-\TeX}| -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\AMSTeX{\AmSTeX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\BibTeX} -% The definitions of \verb|\BibTeX| and \verb|\SLiTeX| in Leslie Lamport's -% latex/local.tex lower the E by 0.7ex, while \TeX in plain.tex lowers -% it by 0.5ex. Oren Patashnik's bibtex/btxdoc.tex and bibtex/btxhak.tex -% [08-Feb-1988] and bibtex/bibtex.web 0.99c [xx-Feb-1988] use this same -% name and definition, but Oren said using \TeX here is ok. (Curiously, -% \LaTeX itself does not define macros for any \TeX ware except \LaTeX and -% \TeX!) -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifOldLaTeX - \newcommand{\BibTeX}{\protect\pBibTeX} - \newcommand{\pBibTeX}{B\kern-.05em% - \hbox{\logo@smaller I\kern-.025emB}\kern-.08em% - \-\TeX} -\else - \DeclareRobustCommand{\BibTeX}{B\kern-.05em% -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The following hack comes from the definition of the macro \LaTeX\ -% cf.~file ``ltlogos.dtx'' from the \LaTeXe\ distribution. der -% \begin{macrocode} - \hbox{$\m@th$% %% force math size calculations - \csname S@\f@size\endcsname - \fontsize\sf@size\z@ - \math@fontsfalse\selectfont - I\kern-.025emB}% - \kern-.08em% - \-\TeX} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\BIBTeX} -% Leslie Lamport uses this spelling in latex.tex, but not as a -% macro. We include it for consistency with AMSTeX. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\BIBTeX{\BibTeX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\BIBTEX} -% Leslie Lamport's latex/slides.tex [05-Jun-1984], -% latex/tmanual.tex [10-Jul-1984] (an early draft of the book), -% and latex/lerrata.tex [23-Jul-1985] have this spelling, but the -% definition \verb|BIB\kern-.1em\TeX|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\BIBTEX{\BibTeX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\LAMSTeX} -% From tugboat.com 1.08 [24-Oct-1990]. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\LAMSTeX{% - L\raise.42ex\hbox{\kern-.3em\the\scriptfont2 A}% - \kern-.2em\lower.376ex\hbox{\the\textfont2 M}% - \kern-.125em {\the\textfont2 S}-\TeX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\LamSTeX} -% This is just a variant of the macro above. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\LamSTeX{\LAMSTeX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\LAmSTeX} -% This variant seems likely to appear: -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\LAmSTeX{\LAMSTeX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\LaTeX} -% The definition from latex.tex (\LaTeX{} VERSION 2.09 $<$14 January -% 1991$>$) and bibtex.web 0.99c [xx-Feb-1988] lowers the E slightly -% more than \TeX, but consistency seems more desirable. See -% comments at \BibTeX. Different definitions are given by -% latex/deproc.sty [24-Apr-1986], amstex/man.sty [15-Dec-1986] -% inputs/tugbot.sty [11-Jan-1988], and latex/tugboat.com 1.08 -% [24-Oct-1990]. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\LaTeX{% - L\kern-.36em\raise.3ex\hbox{\sc a}\kern-.15em\TeX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\LATEX} -% latex/slides.tex [05-Jun-1984] and latex/lerrata.tex [23-Jul-1985] -% have this spelling, but different definitions -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\LATEX{\LaTeX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\LaTeXTeX} -% This logo is invented in \verb|dtk.cls| to denote either \TeX{} or -% \LaTeX. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifOldLaTeX - \newcommand\LaTeXTeX{(\kern-.15emL\kern-.36em\raise.3ex\hbox{\sc - a}\kern-.3em)\kern-.15em\TeX}% -\else - \DeclareRobustCommand{\LaTeXTeX}{(\kern-.15emL\kern-.36em% - {\sbox\z@ T% - \vbox to\ht0{\hbox{$\m@th$% - \csname S@\f@size\endcsname - \fontsize\sf@size\z@ - \math@fontsfalse\selectfont - A}% - \vss}% - }\kern-.2em)% - \kern-.15em% - \TeX} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\MF} -% Don Knuth's mf.web 2.7 [xx-Sep-1990] and Barbara Beeton's -% latex/deproc.sty [24-Apr-1986] use an equivalent of this definition. -% The font is variously named \verb|\logo|, \verb|\manfnt|, and -% \verb|\mf|. plain.tex -% preloads \verb|\manfnt|. manfnt has the letters A, E, F, M, N, O, T in -% various sizes plus extra symbols for Don Knuth's books Computers and -% Typesetting, and Concrete Mathematics, while logo10 has only those -% letters in one size. AmSTeX uses \verb|\logo| in amsppt.sty and -% imappt.sty, so we should avoid it, and tugboat.com uses -% \verb|\mf| for \verb|{\smc Metafont}|. We therefore use -% \verb|\manfnt| here, defining it if necessary. QUESTION: should -% we use manfnt, or logo10? -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ifOldLaTeX - \ifx\manfnt\@undefined - \font\manfnt=logo10 - \fi - \ifx\manfntsl\@undefined - \font\manfntsl=logosl10 - \fi - \newcommand\MF{\begingroup - \ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \let\manfnt=\manfntsl \fi - {\manfnt META}\-{\manfnt FONT}\endgroup\spacefactor1000 }% - \newcommand\MP{\begingroup - \ifdim\fontdimen1\font>0pt \let\manfnt=\manfntsl \fi - {\manfnt META}\-{\manfnt POST}\endgroup\spacefactor1000 }% -\else -% \end{macrocode} -% -% The following improved definitions are taken from mflogo by Ulrik -% Vieth. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \DeclareFontFamily{U}{logo}{} - \DeclareFontShape{U}{logo}{m}{n}{ - <8> <9> gen * logo - <10> <10.95> <12> <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> logo10 - }{} - \DeclareFontShape{U}{logo}{m}{it}{ - <8> <9> gen * logosl - <10> <10.95> <12> <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> logosl10 - }{} - \DeclareFontShape{U}{logo}{m}{sl}{ - <-> ssub * logo/m/it - }{} - \DeclareFontShape{U}{logo}{sbc}{n}{ - <8> <9> sub * logo/m/n - <10> <10.95> <12> <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> logobf10 - }{} - \DeclareFontShape{U}{logo}{b}{n}{ - <8> <9> sub * logo/m/n - <10> <10.95> <12> <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> logod10 - }{} - \DeclareFontShape{U}{logo}{bx}{n}{ - <-> ssub * logo/b/n - }{} - \DeclareRobustCommand\logofamily{% - \not@math@alphabet\logofamily\relax - \fontencoding{U}\fontfamily{logo}\selectfont} - \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textlogo}{\logofamily} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{Hyphenation of meta-font and meta-post only.} -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcommand\MF{\mbox{\textlogo{META}}\-\mbox{\textlogo{FONT}}\@} - \newcommand\MP{\mbox{\textlogo{META}}\-\mbox{\textlogo{POST}}\@} -\fi -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\METAFONT} -% I cannot find any ``official'' uses of this alternate, but it -% seems likely that people will use it. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\METAFONT{\MF} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\METAPOST} -% In analogy to \verb|METAFONT|. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\METAPOST{\MP} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\SLITEX} -% Leslie Lamport's latex/slides.tex [05-Jun-1984]. His -% latex/lerrata.tex [23-Jul-1985] and latex/tmanual.tex -% [10-Jul-1984] (an early draft of the book) define it as -% SLI\TeX! The \LaTeX\ User's Guide and Reference Manual (1986) -% appears to use small caps, and possibly kerning, for Sli. -% I need to ask Leslie to suggest a preferred definition. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\SLITEX{% - S\kern-.065em L\kern-.18em\raise.32ex\hbox{i}% - \kern-.03em\TeX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\SLiTeX} -% latex/local.tex (sample Local Guide) [27-Oct-1988] uses -% this name, but defines it as\\ -% \verb|{\rm S\kern-.06em{\sc l\kern-.035emi}\kern-.06em T\kern|\\ -% \verb| -.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}|\\ -% with an extra-low E, and kerned Sli in small caps. Is this -% what the \LaTeX\ User's Guide and Reference Manual (1986) used? -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\SLiTeX{\SLITEX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\SliTeX} -% latex/slitex.tex [08-Jun-1988] uses SliTeX in typeouts, -% but not as a macro -- what a way to confuse the user. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\SliTeX{\SLITEX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\SLITeX} -% I cannot find a use of this one, but it seems a likely -% candidate anyway, and is consistent with AMSTeX and BIBTeX. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\SLITeX{\SLITEX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Additional Macros} -% -% Some additional logos showed up during the years they are -% collected in this section. -% -% \begin{macro}{\NTS} -% This one comes from a communication with Bernd Raichle. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\NTS{\mbox{\mathsurround=0pt - \(\cal N\mkern -4mu\lower .5ex\hbox{$\cal T$}\mkern -2mu S\)}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\MakeIndex} -% This one comes from a communication with Bernd Raichle based on -% makeindex.tex -- released 17 February 1987 by Leslie Lamport. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\MakeIndex{\textit{Make\-Index}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\emTeX} -% -% \changes{1.3}{1997/02/03}{logo added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\emTeX{{em\TeX}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\PublicTeX} -% -% \changes{1.3}{1997/02/03}{logo added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\PubliCTeX{PubliC\TeX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\TeXXeT} -% This one comes from the sources of web2c. -% \changes{1.2}{1996/12/15}{logo added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\TeXXeT{% - \TeX--X\kern-.125em\lower.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-.1667emT} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\TeXeT} -% This one comes from the sources of web2c. -% \changes{1.2}{1996/12/15}{logo added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\TeXeT{% - \TeX-X\kern-.125em\lower.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-.1667emT} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\WinEdt} -% This one comes from Volker RW Schaa. -% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/02}{logos added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\WinEdt{\mbox{\textsf{WinEdt}}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\WinEdtKK} -% This one comes from Volker RW Schaa. -% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/02}{logos added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\WinEdtKK{\mbox{\textsf{WinEdt2k}}}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\LyX} -% This one comes from an article by Laura E. Jackson and Herbert Vo\ss. -% \changes{1.7}{2001/11/02}{logo added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand{\LyX}{L\kern-.1667em\lower.25em\hbox{Y}\kern-.125emX\@} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\exTeX} -% This one comes from the \exTeX\ team -% \changes{1.9}{2003/11/03}{logo added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand*{\exTeX}{% - \textrm{% das Logo grundsätzlich serifenbehaftet - \ensuremath{\textstyle\varepsilon_{\kern-0.15em\mathcal{X}}}% - \kern-.15em\TeX - }% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \subsection{Additional Macros for Acronyms} -% -% The following macros are maily form the predecessor style -% file. Some new ones have been added. -% -% \begin{macro}{\eV} -% The abbreviation for e.V\kern-.18em.\ is defined in -% this macro. The kerning of the letters is corrected manually. -% -% \begin{macrocode} - \providecommand\eV{e.V\kern-.18em\@ifnextchar.{}{.}} -% \end{macrocode} -% Disclaimer: I have not invented this macro. It has been defined -% this way in the predecessor style. -% \begin{macrocode} -%</logos> -%<*1995> - \renewcommand\eV{e.\kern-.18emV\kern-.18em\@ifnextchar.{}{.}} -%</1995> -%<*logos> -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\dante} -% The ``official logo'' for DANTE e.V\kern-.18em.\ is defined. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\dante{DANTE \eV} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Dante} -% The long name of DANTE. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\Dante{DANTE, - Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX~\eV} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\DTK} -% The long name of this booklet, eh journal. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\DTK{Die \TeX\-ni\-sche Ko\-m{\"o}\-die} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\LaTeXe} -% If \verb|\LaTeXe| is not defined then define it. Since this macro -% is so essential we just want to be sure that it exists. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\LaTeXe{% - \LaTeX{}\kern.05em2$_{\textstyle\varepsilon}$} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\PS} -% We define the logo for Post\-Script. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\PS{Post\-Script} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\PiC} -% For some reason this is not defined in texnames.sty. Since it has -% been in the predecessor of this style it is also defined here. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\PiC{P\kern-.12em\lower.5ex\hbox{I}\kern-.075emC} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\PiCTeX} -% Now the previous macro is combined with \TeX. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\PiCTeX{\PiC\kern-.11em\TeX} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\TUG} -% The \TeX{} Users Group. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\TUG{\TeX{} Users Group} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\TUGboat} -% The communications of the \TeX{} Users Group. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\TUGboat{\textsl{TUGboat}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\TUB} -% The communications of the \TeX{} Users Group. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\TUB\TUGboat -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\TTN} -% The communications of the \TeX{} Users Group -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\TTN{\textsl{\TeX{} and TUG NEWS}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \begin{macro}{\NFSS} -% The New Font Selection Scheme. -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\NFSS{\textsf{NFSS}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\NTS} -% I don't know where this one comes from. -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{NTS logo added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\NTS{\leavevmode - \hbox{$\cal N\kern-0.35em\lower0.5ex\hbox{$\cal T$}\kern-0.2emS$}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\eTeX} -% I don't know where this one comes from. -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/06}{eTeX logo added.} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\eTeX{{\leavevmode\hbox{$\varepsilon$}-\TeX}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ExTeX} -% ^^A das Logo grundsätzlich serifenbehaftet -% This logo will generally sport serifs. -% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/01/15}{ExTeX logo added. (RN)} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand*{\ExTeX}{% RN 2005-01-15 - \textrm{% das Logo grundsätzlich serifenbehaftet - \ensuremath{\textstyle\varepsilon_{\kern-0.15em\mathcal{X}}}% - \kern-.15em\TeX - }% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\DANTE} -% The ``official logo'' for DANTE is defined, using special fonts. -% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/01/15}{DANTE logo with special fonts added. (RN)} -% \begin{macrocode} -\IfFileExists{ot1dante.fd}% RN 2005-01-15 -{% - \providecommand*\DANTE[1][]{% - \begingroup - \usefont{OT1}{dante}{m}{n}\selectfont DANTE% - \endgroup - } -} -{\providecommand*\DANTE[1][]{DANTE}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\ConTeXt} -% \begin{macro}{\conTeXt} -% This one has been missing for a long time! -% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/01/17}{ConTeXt logos added. (RN)} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand*\ConTeXt{Con\TeX t} -\providecommand*\conTeXt{con\TeX t} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Than} -% Makes life easier \ldots -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\Thanh{H\`an Th\^e\protect\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{\relax}}} Th\`anh} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\MiKTeX} -% \begin{macro}{\MikTeX} -% Yet another logo \dots -% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/01/17}{MiKTeX logo added. (RN)} -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand*\MiKTeX{MiK\TeX} -\providecommand*\MikTeX\MiKTeX -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</logos> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -%^^A ??? 2005-02-11 -% \section{The Package dtk-pdf for PDF Reprints} -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/12}{Packet dtk-pdf integrated.} -% -% The following section contains the package which is used to -% produce the PDF files for the WWW. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*pdf> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% A lot of packages are required to get things right. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\ProvidesPackage{dtk-pdf}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space gene] -% \end{macrocode} -% -% A lot of packages are required to get things right. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\RequirePackage{multicol,graphicx,color} -\RequirePackage[bookmarks=false]{hyperref} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Configure the \verb|hyperref| package appropriately. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\definecolor{navy}{rgb}{0,0,.5} -\hypersetup{a5paper,colorlinks,urlcolor=navy} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Slightly adjust the page on the paper. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\oddsidemargin=-10mm -\evensidemargin=-10mm -\topmargin=-15mm -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Volume} -% This macro contains the number of the volume in which the current -% article has been published. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\Volume{?/??} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Pages} -% This macro contains the numbers of the pages on which the -% curtrent article has been published originally. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\Pages{???} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\volume} -% This macro is redefined to show appropriate information. -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\volume{\Volume\ -- Nachdruck} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\titlemark} -% This macro is used in some old articles. Nowadays it simply has -% to eat up one following argument. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\titlemark\@gobble -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcount\AdNo \AdNo=0 -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\Address} -% This macro is used to typeset all adresses. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand\Address{\bigskip\par\advance\AdNo1 - \begin{multicols}2 \count255=0\relax - \loop\csname Address\the\count255\endcsname\advance\count255 1 - \ifnum\count255<\AdNo \repeat - \end{multicols}} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\address[3]{% - \expandafter\gdef\csname Address\the\AdNo\endcsname - {\par\parbox{.45\textwidth}{\footnotesize\raggedright - #1 #2 \\#3}}\advance\AdNo1\relax} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Store the address of DANTE as first address in the list. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\address{\href{http://www.dante.de/}{\Dante}}{}{% - \href{http://www.dante.de/}{Postfach 10\,18\,40\\ - 69008 Heidelberg\\ - \texttt{dante@dante.de}}} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\providecommand\DTK@keywords{} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% \begin{macro}{\m@ketitle} -% Save the meaning of \verb|\maketitle| to extend it. -% \begin{macrocode} -\let\m@ketitle=\maketitle -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\maketitle} -% The macro is redefined to typeset the head of the single article. -% Th information for the author and the title are stored in the PDF -% information fields aswell. This may lead to problems if they -% contain certain macros. -% \changes{1.5}{2001/10/21}{Mapping of certain macros} -% \changes{1.8}{2003/06/22}{Making thanks void when processing the -% head of a reprint} -% \begin{macrocode} -\renewcommand\maketitle{% - \thispagestyle{empty}% - \newlength{\l@@x}\settowidth{\l@@x}{\Large\DTK}% - \advance\l@@x3em\quad - \href{http://www.dante.de/dante/DTK}{% - \rotatebox{90}{\hspace*{1.5em}\Large\DTK}} - \rule{.9pt}{\l@@x}\quad - % - \begin{minipage}[b]{.75\textwidth}\parskip=1ex - {\raggedleft\large - \href{http://www.dante.de/}{DANTE\\ - Deutschsprachige\\ - Anwendervereinigung \TeX\ e.V.}\medskip\par - }% - {\let\thanks\@gobble - \ifx\@author\empty\else\@author: \fi - \ifx\@title\empty\else\emph{\@title}, \fi - } - \DTK\ \Volume, S.\ \Pages.\medskip - - \scriptsize Reproduktion oder Nutzung dieses Beitrags durch - konventionelle, elektronische oder beliebige andere Verfahren ist - nur im nicht-kommerziellen Rahmen gestattet. Verwendungen in - gr"o"serem Umfang bitte zur Information bei \dante{} melden. F\"ur - kommerzielle Nutzung ist die Zustimmung der Autoren einzuholen. - - \DTK\ ist die Mitgliedszeitschrift von \Dante. Einzelne Hefte - k\"onnen von Mitgliedern bei der Gesch\"aftsstelle von \Dante\ - erworben werden. Mitglieder erhalten \DTK\ im Rahmen ihrer - Mitgliedschaft. - \end{minipage} - - \begingroup - \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% - \def\BibTeX{BibTeX}% - \def\TeX{TeX}% - \def\LyX{LyX}% - \hypersetup{% - pdftitle=\@title, - pdfauthor=\@author, - pdfkeywords={\DTK@keywords}, - pdfsubject={\volume}, - pdfstartview={FitBH} - }% - \endgroup - \m@ketitle -} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% \begin{macro}{\textcentigrade} -% This macro is defined for backward compatibility. -% \begin{macrocode} -\def\textcentigrade{\textcelsius} -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% -% -% \verb|\guillemotleft|/\verb|\guillemotright| from the polish -% version of the ``computer modern''. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\AtBeginDocument{% - \DeclareFontEncoding{OT4}{}{}% - \DeclareFontEncoding{TS1}{}{}% - \DeclareFontSubstitution{OT4}{cmr}{m}{n}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{\encodingdefault}{% - {\fontencoding{OT4}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\char174}}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotright}{\encodingdefault}{% - {\fontencoding{OT4}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\char175}}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\guilsinglleft}{\encodingdefault}{% - {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\char14}}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\guilsinglright}{\encodingdefault}{% - {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\char15}}% - \DeclareTextCommand{\textperthousand}{\encodingdefault}{% - {\fontencoding{TS1}\fontfamily{cmr}\selectfont\char135}}% -} -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% -% \begin{macrocode} -\newif\ifmaintitle -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Old versions of \LaTeX\ used to define \verb|\footheight|. Some -% articles try to redefine this length. Nowadays it is simply -% ignored. -% \begin{macrocode} -\newlength\footheight -% \end{macrocode} -% -% Now the packet is complete. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%</pdf> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \section{The Index Style} -% \changes{1.4}{2000/08/27}{Index file integrated into the dtx file.} -% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/01/15}{Addresses are now collected via -% glossary instead of index (RN).} -% \changes{1.9-pre}{2005/01/15}{Add keyword \cmd{\glossaryentry} (RN).} -% -% The index style is used to sort the authors of the journal for -% the list of all authors. Makeindex is used for this purpose. Here -% we have to define the appropriate configuration file. -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*adr> -actual '*' -preamble "\\begin{theaddresses}" -postamble "\n\\end{theaddresses}\n" -item_0 "\n \\addressitem{" -item_2 "}{" -item_x1 "}{" -item_x2 "}{" -delim_0 "}{" -delim_1 "}{" -delim_2 "}{" -delim_t "}" -group_skip "" -quote '$' -%%$ -keyword "\\glossaryentry" -%</adr> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% -% \section{The Index Style} -% -% ??? -% -% \begin{macrocode} -%<*idx> -%% -%% This is file `Letter.ist', -%% -%% The idea is from Ingo Kloeckl, Latex2e: -%% Herbert Voss 000726 -%% -%% This is a MAKEINDEX style file which should be used to -%% generate the formatted change history for use with the doc -%% package. The TeX commands used below are defined in -%% doc.sty. The commands for MAKEINDEX like `level' -%% `item_x1' are described in `` Makeindex, A General -%% Purpose, Formatter-Independent Index Processor'' by -%% Pehong Chen. -%% -headings_flag 1 % headings yes -heading_prefix "{\\SectionFont "% -heading_suffix "}\n" % newline -% -quote '"' -%%level '>' -preamble - "\\begin{theindex}\n" -item_1 - "\\par\\leavevmode\\hangindent10pt\\makebox[10pt][l]{--}" -item_01 - "\\par\\leavevmode\\hangindent10pt\\makebox[10pt][l]{--}" -item_x1 - "\\par\\leavevmode\\hangindent10pt\\makebox[10pt][l]{--}" -item_2 - "\\par\\leavevmode\\hangindent20pt\\makebox[20pt][l]{-- -- }" -item_12 - "\\par\\leavevmode\\hangindent20pt\\makebox[20pt][l]{-- -- }" -item_x2 - "\\par\\leavevmode\\hangindent20pt\\makebox[20pt][l]{-- -- }" -%% -%% -%% End of file `Letter.ist'. -%</idx> -% \end{macrocode} -% -% That's all. -% -% \Finale -% -\endinput -% -% Local Variables: -% mode: latex -% TeX-master: t -% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dtk/dtk.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dtk/dtk.ins deleted file mode 100644 index 9d8b200d3b1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/dtk/dtk.ins +++ /dev/null @@ -1,91 +0,0 @@ -%% Time-stamp: "dtk.ins 2007-08-28 21:43:35 hv" -%%------------------------------------------------------------------ -%% Driver file to extract the dtx style and class files. -%% -%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer -%% Copyright (C) 1997-2005 DANTE, Deutschsprachige -%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V. -%% -%% dtk.ins is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but -%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts -%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for -%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless -%% he says so in writing. -%% -%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute -%% dtk.ins, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any -%% modifications are indicated. -%% -%%------------------------------------------------------------------ -%% -%% Run this file through TeX or LaTeX to extract the files. -%% You need the docstrip package as distributed with LaTeX2e. -%% It is also available as seperate package from any CTAN site. -%% -%%------------------------------------------------------------------ -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% $Id: dtk.ins,v 1.6 2007/08/28 20:57:17 hv Exp $ -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\input docstrip.tex -\keepsilent -\askonceonly - -\generate{ -% style file still useful? - \file{dtk.sty}{\from{dtk.dtx}{class}} - \file{dtk.cls}{\from{dtk.dtx}{class}} -% \file{dtk95.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{1995}} -% \file{dtk96.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{1996}} -% \file{dtk97.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{1997}} -% \file{dtk98.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{1998}} -% \file{dtk99.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{1999}} -% \file{dtk00.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2000}} -% \file{dtk01.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2001}} -% \file{dtk02.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2002}} -% \file{dtk03.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2003}} -% \file{dtk04.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2004}} -% \file{dtk05.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2005}} -% \file{dtk06.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2006}} - \file{dtk07.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2006|2007}} -% \file{dtk08.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2008}} -% \file{dtk09.clo}{\from{dtk.dtx}{2009}} - \file{dtklogos.sty}{\from{dtk.dtx}{logos}} - \file{dtk-pdf.sty}{\from{dtk.dtx}{pdf}} - } -% warum ohne Prae-/Postambel? -% Makeindex vertraegt doch % als Kommentarzeichen -- oder? -\nopreamble\nopostamble -\generate{ - \file{dtk-idx.ist}{\from{dtk.dtx}{idx}} - \file{dtk-adr.ist}{\from{dtk.dtx}{adr}} - } - -\Msg{****************************************************************} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following} -\Msg{* files into a directory searched by (La)TeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space dtk.cls dtk.sty} -%\Msg{* \space\space dtk95.clo dtk96.clo dtk97.clo dtk98.clo dtk99.clo} -%\Msg{* \space\space dtk00.clo dtk01.clo dtk02.clo dtk03.clo} % dtk04.clo -\Msg{* \space\space dtk07.clo} % dtk06.clo dtk07.clo dtk08.clo dtk09.clo -\Msg{* \space\space dtklogos.sty dtk-pdf.sty} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* and the following file into a directory searched by makeindex:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space dtk-idx.ist dtk-adr.ist} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Additionally copy the following file to a directory searched} -\Msg{* by BibTeX:} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* \space\space dtk.bst} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* To produce the documentation run dtk.dtx through LaTeX,} -\Msg{* makeindex, and LaTeX twice again.} -\Msg{*} -\Msg{* Happy TeXing} -\Msg{****************************************************************} - -\endbatchfile -\endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk-pdf.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk-pdf.sty index 0ffe3cc2a87..45f5eb48f3f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk-pdf.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk-pdf.sty @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ %% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv" %% %%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $ +%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 2.0 2009/07/26 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $ %%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %% Purpose: %% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. @@ -77,8 +77,8 @@ %%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\DTKrcs$#1: #2 #3${#2} \def\filename{dtk.dtx} -\xdef\fileversion{\DTKrcs$Revision: 1.10 $} -\xdef\filedate{\DTKrcs$Date: 2007/08/28 18:17:42 $} +\xdef\fileversion{\DTKrcs$Revision: 1.9a $} +\xdef\filedate{\DTKrcs$Date: 2005/10/29 18:17:42 $} \let\docversion=\fileversion \let\docdate=\filedate \ProvidesPackage{dtk-pdf}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space gene] @@ -103,8 +103,8 @@ \expandafter\gdef\csname Address\the\AdNo\endcsname {\par\parbox{.45\textwidth}{\footnotesize\raggedright #1 #2 \\#3}}\advance\AdNo1\relax} -\address{\href{http://www.dante.de/}{\Dante}}{}{% - \href{http://www.dante.de/}{Postfach 10\,18\,40\\ +\address{\href{http://cms.dante.de/}{\Dante}}{}{% + \href{http://cms.dante.de/}{Postfach 10\,18\,40\\ 69008 Heidelberg\\ \texttt{dante@dante.de}}} \providecommand\DTK@keywords{} @@ -113,13 +113,13 @@ \thispagestyle{empty}% \newlength{\l@@x}\settowidth{\l@@x}{\Large\DTK}% \advance\l@@x3em\quad - \href{http://www.dante.de/dante/DTK}{% + \href{http://archiv.dante.de/dante/DTK}{% \rotatebox{90}{\hspace*{1.5em}\Large\DTK}} \rule{.9pt}{\l@@x}\quad % \begin{minipage}[b]{.75\textwidth}\parskip=1ex {\raggedleft\large - \href{http://www.dante.de/}{DANTE\\ + \href{http://cms.dante.de/}{DANTE\\ Deutschsprachige\\ Anwendervereinigung \TeX\ e.V.}\medskip\par }% @@ -131,8 +131,8 @@ \scriptsize Reproduktion oder Nutzung dieses Beitrags durch konventionelle, elektronische oder beliebige andere Verfahren ist - nur im nicht-kommerziellen Rahmen gestattet. Verwendungen in - gr"o"serem Umfang bitte zur Information bei \dante{} melden. F\"ur + nur im nichtkommerziellen Rahmen gestattet. Verwendungen in + gr\"o\ss erem Umfang bitte zur Information bei \dante{} melden. F\"ur kommerzielle Nutzung ist die Zustimmung der Autoren einzuholen. \DTK\ ist die Mitgliedszeitschrift von \Dante. Einzelne Hefte diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.clo new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..f34fc7d9759 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.clo @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ + +\ProvidesFile{dtk.clo} + [2009/11/07 v0.2 dtk class option (RN,hv)] + +\renewcommand\CoverArt[3]{% + \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined + %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{ecrm1700 scaled \magstep 5} + %\newfont\CoverTitleFont{lmr12 scaled 2938} + \DeclareFixedFont\CoverTitleFont{\encodingdefault}{\rmdefault}{m}{n}{41.26}% + \fi + \ifx\CoverNumberFont\@undefined + %\newfont\CoverNumberFont{ecrm1700 scaled 2986} + \DeclareFixedFont\CoverNumberFont{\encodingdefault}{\rmdefault}{m}{n}{51.66}% + \fi +\iffalse + \vspace*{-34pt}\hfill + \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to \textheight{\null\hfill\CoverTitleFont + \fontsize{41.26}{42}\selectfont\journalname\hfill\null}% + \@tempdimb=\ht\@tempboxa + \advance\@tempdimb by\dp\@tempboxa + \hbox to\@tempdimb{\kern-20pt% + \vbox to\wd\@tempboxa{% + \vskip\wd\@tempboxa + \vss\rotatebox{90}{\box\@tempboxa}}\hss} \ + \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight} +\fi + \newsavebox\dtk@titlebox + \sbox\dtk@titlebox{\parbox{\textheight}{% + \null\hfill\CoverTitleFont\fontsize{41.26}{42}\selectfont\journalname\hfill\null}} +% \hspace*{5pt} + \rotatebox{90}{\usebox\dtk@titlebox}\ + \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight} + \hfill +% + \begin{minipage}[b]{.7\textwidth}\raggedright + \rule{1em}{0pt}% + \dimen2=\textwidth\advance\dimen2-1em + \parbox{\dimen2}{\CoverArt@font + {\Huge\DANTE}\\ + Deutschsprachige\\ + Anwendervereinigung + \TeX\ \eV}\\[1ex] + \dimen3=\textwidth\advance\dimen3-\CoverArt@gap + \hfill\rule{\dimen3}{\CoverArt@linewidth}% + \\[-\baselineskip]\null\hspace{1em}% + {\CoverArt@small\cover@sub{#1}{#2}{#3}}% + \\[-\baselineskip]\rule{0pt}{.617647\textheight}% + \CoverNumberFont + \null\hfill + \makebox(0,0)[br]{% + \textcolor{CoverArt@grey}{% + \CoverArt@strip@no #1;\hspace{1pt}% + }}% Warum verwendet `\CoverArt@strip@no' \CoverTitleFont? RN + \end{minipage}% +} + +%\PassOptionsToPackage{ngerman}{babel} +%\RequirePackage[ngerman]{babel} + +\iffalse +\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"`}{\frqq}% +\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"'}{\flqq}% +%\def@dqmacro{`}{\frqq}{\frqq} +%\def@dqmacro{'}{\flqq}{\flqq} +\else + \@ifpackageloaded{babel}{% + \defineshorthand{"`}{\guillemotright} + \defineshorthand{"'}{\guillemotleft} + }{% + \@ifpackageloaded{ngerman}{% + \def@dqmacro{`}{\frqq}{\frqq} + \def@dqmacro{'}{\flqq}{\flqq} + }{}% + } +\fi + +\newif\ifDTKcolor \DTKcolorfalse + +\RequirePackage{xcolor} +\RequirePackage{longtable} +\RequirePackage[font=sf]{caption} + +\ifDTKcolor + \definecolor{DTKlstBackground}{rgb}{1,1,0.85} + \definecolor{DTKlstKeys}{rgb}{0,0,1} + \definecolor{DTKlstIdentifiers}{rgb}{0,0,0} + \definecolor{DTKlstComments}{rgb}{1,0,0} + \definecolor{DTKlstStrings}{rgb}{0,0.5,0} +\else + \colorlet{DTKlstBackground}{black!10} + \colorlet{DTKlstKeys}{black} + \colorlet{DTKlstIdentifiers}{black} + \colorlet{DTKlstComments}{black} + \colorlet{DTKlstStrings}{black} +\fi + +\RequirePackage[final]{listings} + +\newcommand*\DTK@lst@colorbox[2]{% + \fboxsep=.16em\relax + \settowidth\@ovxx{#2}\settoheight\@ovyy{#2}% + \makebox[\@ovxx][c]{\colorbox{#1}{\raisebox{0pt}[\@ovyy][0pt]{#2}}}% +} + +\lstdefinestyle{DTKlstBase}{% + basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily, + identifierstyle=\color{DTKlstIdentifiers}, + keywordstyle=\color{DTKlstKeys}, + stringstyle=\itshape\color{DTKlstStrings}, + commentstyle=\itshape\color{DTKlstComments}, + columns=fixed, + tabsize=2, + frame=single, + extendedchars=true, + showspaces=false, + showstringspaces=false, + breaklines=true, + breakindent=10pt, + backgroundcolor=\color{DTKlstBackground}, + breakautoindent=true, + captionpos=t, + aboveskip=\medskipamount, + belowskip=\medskipamount, + xrightmargin=\fboxsep, + emphstyle=\DTK@lst@colorbox{lightgray}, + prebreak=\mbox{$\hookleftarrow$}, + literate={ä}{{\"a}}1 {ö}{{\"o}}1 {ü}{{\"u}}1 + {Ä}{{\"A}}1 {Ö}{{\"O}}1 {Ãœ}{{\"U}}1 {ß}{\ss}1 +} + +\lstdefinestyle{DTKlstNumber}{% + style=DTKlstBase, + numbers=left, + numberstyle=\tiny\ttfamily, + numbersep=1em, + xleftmargin=1.5em, +} + +\lstdefinestyle{DTKlstNoNumber}{% + style=DTKlstBase, + numbers=none, + xleftmargin=\fboxsep, +} + +\lst@AddToHookExe{DeInit}{% + \@tempdima=\lst@belowskip \advance\@tempdima-.65\baselineskip + \edef\lst@belowskip{\the\@tempdima}% +} + +\let\verbatim=\relax +\lstnewenvironment{verbatim} +{\lstset{language={},style=DTKlstNoNumber}} +{} + +\AtBeginDocument{% + \belowcaptionskip=\abovecaptionskip +} + +\lstset{style=DTKlstNoNumber} + +\endinput + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.cls index 76785eb4a88..7034349d0f2 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.cls +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.cls @@ -1,89 +1,36 @@ %% %% This is file `dtk.cls', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. %% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% dtk.dtx (with options: `class') -%% -%% IMPORTANT NOTICE: -%% -%% For the copyright see the source file. -%% -%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed -%% with new filenames distinct from dtk.cls. -%% -%% For distribution of the original source see the terms -%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx. -%% -%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the -%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the -%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be -%% in the same archive or directory.) -%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv" -%% -%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $ -%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% Purpose: -%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. -%% -%% Documentation: -%% The documentation can be generated from the original file -%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to -%% get the full documentation in DVI format. -%% -%% -%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer -%% Mainzer Str. 8 -%% 56321 Rhens (Germany) -%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de +%% LaTeX Class for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. %% %% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer -%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige +%% Copyright (C) 1997-2010 DANTE, Deutschsprachige %% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V. %% -%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but -%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts -%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for -%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless -%% he says so in writing. -%% -%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute -%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any -%% modifications are indicated. -%% -%% -%% This class is still under development and may be replaced with a -%% new version which provides enhanced functionality. -%% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\def\DTKrcs$#1: #2 #3${#2} -\def\filename{dtk.dtx} -\xdef\fileversion{\DTKrcs$Revision: 1.10 $} -\xdef\filedate{\DTKrcs$Date: 2007/08/28 18:17:42 $} -\let\docversion=\fileversion -\let\docdate=\filedate +%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the +%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c +%% of this license or (at your option) any later version. +%% The latest version of this license is in +%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +%% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +%% version 2005/12/01 or later. +% +\def\filename{dtk.cls} +\def\fileversion{1.20} +\def\filedate{2009/11/07} +% +\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01] +\ProvidesClass{dtk}[\filedate~\fileversion + dtk document class (gn,rn,hv)] +\let\DTKversion=\fileversion +\let\DTKdate=\filedate \newif\ifDTK@Author@ \DTK@Author@true \newif\ifDTK@Draft@ +\newif\ifDTK@tgpagella@ +\newif\ifDTK@tgschola@ +\DTK@tgpagella@false +\DTK@tgschola@false \newif\ifDTK@lineno@ \DTK@lineno@false \newif\ifDTK@german@ @@ -138,6 +85,8 @@ \DeclareOption{full}{\DTK@Author@false} \DeclareOption{omitgerman}{\DTK@german@false} \DeclareOption{ancient}{\def\DTK@layout{95}} +\DeclareOption{tgpagella}{\DTK@tgpagella@true} +\DeclareOption{tgschola}{\DTK@tgschola@true} \DeclareOption{draft}{% \DTK@Draft@true \DTK@lineno@true @@ -182,6 +131,7 @@ \DeclareOption{00}{\def\DTK@layout{00}} \DeclareOption{01}{\def\DTK@layout{01}} \DeclareOption{02}{\def\DTK@layout{02}} +\DeclareOption{08}{\def\DTK@layout{08}} \DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{book}} \else \DeclareOption*{% @@ -194,7 +144,7 @@ \LoadClass{book} \ifDTK@lineno@ \RequirePackage{lineno}\linenumbers - \RequirePackage{color}% + \RequirePackage{xcolor}% \linenumbersep=.8ex \def\linenumberfont{\normalfont\scriptsize\sffamily\bfseries}% \definecolor{DTK@lineno@color}{cmyk}{0.26,0,0.76,0}% SpringGreen @@ -206,16 +156,31 @@ \fi %%%%%%%%%% \RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc} -\IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\RequirePackage{lmodern}}{} -\RequirePackage[full]{textcomp} -\ifDTK@Author@\else - \RequirePackage[utf8]{inputenc} +\ifDTK@tgpagella@ + \RequirePackage{mathpazo,tgpagella} +\else + \ifDTK@tgschola@ + \usepackage[charter,expert]{mathdesign} + \def\rmdefault{bch} % not scaled + \else +% \RequirePackage%[lucidascale] +% {lucidabr} +% \RequirePackage[scaled=1.0]{libertine} + \RequirePackage{lmodern} + \fi \fi +\RequirePackage[scaled=0.83]{luximono} +\RequirePackage[full]{textcomp} +\ifDTK@Author@\else\RequirePackage[utf8]{inputenc}\fi +\usepackage{fixltx2e} \usepackage[hyphens]{url} +\def\URL#1{\protect\url{#1}} \usepackage[newcommands,newparameters]{ragged2e} -\@ifundefined{flushleft} - {\let\flushleft\FlushLeft\let\endflushleft\endFlushLeft}{} \usepackage{filecontents} + +\RequirePackage{babel} +\RequirePackage{tabularx} +\iffalse \ifDTK@german@ \RequirePackage{ngerman} \selectlanguage{ngerman} @@ -225,9 +190,11 @@ \typeout{*** Don't forget to use the macro \string\DTKgerman\space afterwards.} \fi +\fi + \RequirePackage{multicol} \ifDTK@Author@\else - \RequirePackage{graphicx,color} + \RequirePackage{graphicx,xcolor} \errorcontextlines=100\relax \fi \RequirePackage{dtklogos} @@ -243,7 +210,7 @@ \fi} \paperwidth = 148.5mm \paperheight = 210mm -\textheight = 471pt +\textheight = 485pt %%%%471pt \textwidth = 333pt \oddsidemargin = 0pt \evensidemargin = \oddsidemargin\oddsidemargin -35.89157pt @@ -252,7 +219,7 @@ \headheight = 17pt \headsep = 17pt \footskip = 24pt -\parskip = 0.5\baselineskip \advance\parskip by 0pt plus 2pt +\parskip = 0.3\baselineskip \advance\parskip by 0pt plus 2pt \parindent = 0pt \renewcommand\topfraction{.9} \renewcommand\bottomfraction{.9} @@ -390,12 +357,6 @@ \providecommand\Macro[1]{\texttt{#1}} \providecommand\Environment[1]{\texttt{#1}} \providecommand\Email[1]{\texttt{#1}} -%% hv 2006-08-11 -\providecommand*{\nolinkurl}{\url} -\providecommand*{\href}[1]{} -\newcommand*{\CTANurl}[1]{% - \href{ftp://ftp.ctan.org/tex-archive/#1}{\nolinkurl{CTAN:#1}}% -} \providecommand\Acronym[1]{\textsc{#1}} \def\@listI{% \leftmargin = \leftmargini @@ -452,13 +413,13 @@ } \newcommand\rolllabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep \textbf{#1}\hfill} \newenvironment{example}{\begin{quote}\small}{\end{quote}} -\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\par\addcontentsline{\csname - ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}{\protect\numberline{\csname - the#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}}\begingroup - \@parboxrestore - \small - \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par - \endgroup} +%\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\par\addcontentsline{\csname +% ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}{\protect\numberline{\csname +% the#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}}\begingroup +% \@parboxrestore +% \small +% \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par +% \endgroup} \setcounter{secnumdepth}{0} \newif\ifFirstArticle \FirstArticletrue @@ -508,19 +469,13 @@ \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}% \markboth{#1}{#1}% \FirstArticletrue - \@startsection{chapter}{0}{\z@}{-1ex plus-1ex minus - -.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\ChapterFont}*% - } -\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{% - -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\SectionFont}} -\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{% - -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsectionFont}} -\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{% - -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} -\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{% - 0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} -\renewcommand\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{4}% - {\parindent}{0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} + \@startsection{chapter}{0}{\z@}{-1ex plus-1ex minus -.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\ChapterFont}*} +\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.2ex plus .1ex}{\SectionFont}} +\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{2pt plus .1ex}{\SubsectionFont}} +\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.2ex plus.1ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} +\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} +\renewcommand\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{4}{\parindent}{0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} +% \newcommand\keywords[1]{\def\DTK@keywords{#1}} \def\DTK@keywords{} \renewcommand\maketitle{% @@ -711,12 +666,15 @@ \fi \newcommand\CoverArt[3]{% \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined - \newfont\CoverTitleFont{ecrm1700 scaled \magstep 5} + \newfont\CoverTitleFont{ +% ecrm1700 + lmr10 scaled \magstep 5} \fi \ifx\CoverNumberFont\@undefined - \newfont\CoverNumberFont{ecrm1700 scaled 2986} + \newfont\CoverNumberFont{%ecrm1700 + lmr10 scaled 2986} \fi - \vspace*{-34pt}\hfill + \vspace*{-34pt}%\hfill \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to \textheight{\null\hfill\CoverTitleFont \journalname\hfill\null}% \@tempdimb=\ht\@tempboxa @@ -750,9 +708,7 @@ \newcommand\cover@sub[3]{% #2. Jahrgang\quad Heft #1\quad #3% } -\ifDTK@Author@\else - \definecolor{CoverArt@grey}{gray}{.8} -\fi +\ifDTK@Author@\else\definecolor{CoverArt@grey}{gray}{.8}\fi \def\CoverArt@strip@no#1/#2;{#1\raisebox{0.35ex}{\CoverTitleFont/}#2} \newcommand\CoverArt@linewidth{0pt}%{1.2pt} \newcommand\CoverArt@barwidth{2.41pt} @@ -893,6 +849,7 @@ \parskip=\ContentsParSkip \let\\=\relax \TOC@configure + \raggedright%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% hv 2009-07-25 \@starttoc{toc} \endgroup } @@ -1028,11 +985,7 @@ \g@addto@macro\DTK@embedded@enddocumenthook} \AtEmbeddedEndDocument{\endinput} \newcommand*\DTK@jobname{} -\ifDTK@Author@ - \edef\DTK@jobname{komoedie} -\else - \edef\DTK@jobname{\jobname} -\fi +\ifDTK@Author@\edef\DTK@jobname{komoedie}\else\edef\DTK@jobname{\jobname}\fi \newcommand*\DTK@local@jobname{} \newcommand*\DTK@local@inputname{} %%%\newcommand*\DTK@PSforPDF{} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.sty deleted file mode 100644 index 9990c26e07d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk.sty +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1140 +0,0 @@ -%% -%% This is file `dtk.sty', -%% generated with the docstrip utility. -%% -%% The original source files were: -%% -%% dtk.dtx (with options: `class') -%% -%% IMPORTANT NOTICE: -%% -%% For the copyright see the source file. -%% -%% Any modified versions of this file must be renamed -%% with new filenames distinct from dtk.sty. -%% -%% For distribution of the original source see the terms -%% for copying and modification in the file dtk.dtx. -%% -%% This generated file may be distributed as long as the -%% original source files, as listed above, are part of the -%% same distribution. (The sources need not necessarily be -%% in the same archive or directory.) -%% Time-stamp: "dtk.dtx 2006-08-11 18:18:53 CET Mittwoch RN/HjG/hv" -%% -%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%^^A $Id: dtk.dtx,v 1.9b 2006/08/11 21:03:42 hv Exp hv $ -%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% Purpose: -%% LaTeX Class and Styles for ``Die TeXnische Komoedie''. -%% -%% Documentation: -%% The documentation can be generated from the original file -%% dtk.dtx with the doc style/package. LaTeX the file dtk.tex to -%% get the full documentation in DVI format. -%% -%% -%% Author: Gerd Neugebauer -%% Mainzer Str. 8 -%% 56321 Rhens (Germany) -%% Mail: gene@gerd-neugebauer.de -%% -%% Copyright (C) 1995-1996 Gerd Neugebauer -%% Copyright (C) 1997-2006 DANTE, Deutschsprachige -%% Anwendervereinigung TeX e.V. -%% -%% dtk.dtx is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but -%% WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. No author or distributor accepts -%% responsibility to anyone for the consequences of using it or for -%% whether it serves any particular purpose or works at all, unless -%% he says so in writing. -%% -%% Everyone is granted permission to copy, modify and redistribute -%% dtk.dtx, provided this copyright notice is preserved and any -%% modifications are indicated. -%% -%% -%% This class is still under development and may be replaced with a -%% new version which provides enhanced functionality. -%% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% \CharacterTable -%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z -%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z -%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 -%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# -%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& -%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) -%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \, -%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ -%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< -%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? -%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ -%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ -%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \| -%% Right brace \} Tilde \~} -%% -%%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\def\DTKrcs$#1: #2 #3${#2} -\def\filename{dtk.dtx} -\xdef\fileversion{\DTKrcs$Revision: 1.10 $} -\xdef\filedate{\DTKrcs$Date: 2007/08/28 18:17:42 $} -\let\docversion=\fileversion -\let\docdate=\filedate -\newif\ifDTK@Author@ -\DTK@Author@true -\newif\ifDTK@Draft@ -\newif\ifDTK@lineno@ -\DTK@lineno@false -\newif\ifDTK@german@ -\DTK@german@true -\ifx\documentclass\@undefined - \newcommand\RequirePackage[1]{ - \chardef\DTK@cat=\the\catcode`\@ - \catcode`\@=11 - \input{#1.sty}% - \catcode`\@=\DTK@cat} - \let\LoadClass=\RequirePackage - \newcommand\InputIfFileExists[3]{% - \openin\DTK@file #1 - \ifeof\DTK@file\closein\DTK@file #3% - \else\closein\DTK@file #2\input{#1}% - \fi} - \newcommand\DeclareOption{\@ifstar{\@gobble}{\DTK@DeclareOption}} - \newcommand\DTK@DeclareOption[2]{\@namedef{ds@#1}{#2}} - \let\ProcessOptions=\relax - \let\OptionNotUsed=\gobble - \def\ProvidesClass#1[#2]{\typeout{Document Style #1 #2}} - \newcommand\emph[1]{{\em #1}\/} - \newcommand\textbf[1]{{\bf #1}} - \newcommand\textrm[1]{{\rm #1}} - \newcommand\textsc[1]{{\sc #1}} - \newcommand\textsf[1]{{\sf #1}} - \newcommand\textsl[1]{{\sl #1\/}} - \newcommand\textit[1]{{\it #1\/}} - \newcommand\texttt[1]{{\tt #1}} - - \@ifundefined{fontshape}{\let\fontshape=\@gobble}{} - \@ifundefined{selectfont}{\let\selectfont=\relax}{} - - \newcommand\providescommand[2]{\ifx#1\@undefined\newcommand#1{#2}\fi} -\fi -\newread\DTK@file -\ProvidesClass{dtk}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space gene] -\newcommand\DTK@isnum[1]{% - \if!\ifnum9<1#1!\else_\fi - \expandafter\@firstoftwo - \else - \expandafter\@secondoftwo - \fi -} -\newcommand*\DTK@@thelinenumber{\thepage-\arabic{linenumber}} -%%%% -\DeclareOption{10pt}{\OptionNotUsed} -\DeclareOption{11pt}{\OptionNotUsed} -\DeclareOption{12pt}{\OptionNotUsed} -\DeclareOption{twoside}{\OptionNotUsed} -\DeclareOption{oneside}{\OptionNotUsed} -\DeclareOption{full}{\DTK@Author@false} -\DeclareOption{omitgerman}{\DTK@german@false} -\DeclareOption{ancient}{\def\DTK@layout{95}} -\DeclareOption{draft}{% - \DTK@Draft@true - \DTK@lineno@true - \PassOptionsToPackage{pagewise}{lineno}% - \PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{book}% -} -\DeclareOption{linenumbers}{\DTK@lineno@true} -\DeclareOption{nolinenumbers}{\DTK@lineno@false} -\DeclareOption{pagewise}{% - \PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{lineno}} -\DeclareOption{running}{% - \PassOptionsToPackage{\CurrentOption}{lineno}} -\DeclareOption{ln-long}{\def\DTK@@thelinenumber{% - %\def\Hugo{% - \ifoddNumberedPage% eigtl. Even!!! - \ifodd\c@page - \@tempswatrue %C - \else - \@tempswafalse %D - \fi - \else - \ifodd\c@page - \@tempswafalse %A - \else - \@tempswatrue %B - \fi - \fi - %}\Hugo - %\@tempcnta=\c@page - %\if@tempswa \advance\@tempcnta\@ne \fi - \if@tempswa \advance\c@page\@ne \fi - %\edef\thepage{\the\@tempcnta}% - \thepage-\arabic{linenumber}}} -\DeclareOption{ln-short}{\def\DTK@@thelinenumber{% - \arabic{linenumber}}} -\iffalse% RN 2005-01-15 -\DeclareOption{95}{\def\DTK@layout{95}} -\DeclareOption{96}{\def\DTK@layout{96}} -\DeclareOption{97}{\def\DTK@layout{97}} -\DeclareOption{98}{\def\DTK@layout{98}} -\DeclareOption{99}{\def\DTK@layout{99}} -\DeclareOption{00}{\def\DTK@layout{00}} -\DeclareOption{01}{\def\DTK@layout{01}} -\DeclareOption{02}{\def\DTK@layout{02}} -\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{book}} -\else -\DeclareOption*{% - \DTK@isnum{\CurrentOption}% - {\edef\DTK@layout{\CurrentOption}}% - {\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{book}}% -} -\fi -\ProcessOptions -\LoadClass{book} -\ifDTK@lineno@ - \RequirePackage{lineno}\linenumbers - \RequirePackage{color}% - \linenumbersep=.8ex - \def\linenumberfont{\normalfont\scriptsize\sffamily\bfseries}% - \definecolor{DTK@lineno@color}{cmyk}{0.26,0,0.76,0}% SpringGreen - \def\thelinenumber{% - \begingroup - \fboxsep=.3ex\fcolorbox{black}{DTK@lineno@color}{% - \DTK@@thelinenumber}% - \endgroup}% -\fi -%%%%%%%%%% -\RequirePackage[T1]{fontenc} -\IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\RequirePackage{lmodern}}{} -\RequirePackage[full]{textcomp} -\ifDTK@Author@\else - \RequirePackage[utf8]{inputenc} -\fi -\usepackage[hyphens]{url} -\usepackage[newcommands,newparameters]{ragged2e} -\@ifundefined{flushleft} - {\let\flushleft\FlushLeft\let\endflushleft\endFlushLeft}{} -\usepackage{filecontents} -\ifDTK@german@ -\RequirePackage{ngerman} -\selectlanguage{ngerman} -\else -\typeout{*** Warning: Loading of (n)german has been omitted. You have to - load it manually.} -\typeout{*** Don't forget to use the macro \string\DTKgerman\space - afterwards.} -\fi -\RequirePackage{multicol} -\ifDTK@Author@\else - \RequirePackage{graphicx,color} - \errorcontextlines=100\relax -\fi -\RequirePackage{dtklogos} -\newcommand\NeedPackage[1]{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname ver@#1.sty\endcsname\relax - \typeout{***}% - \typeout{***}% - \typeout{*** The required package `#1' seems not to be loaded.}% - \typeout{*** I try to stumble along as good as I can.}% - \typeout{*** Expect some undefined macros or other errors.}% - \typeout{***}% - \typeout{***}% - \fi} -\paperwidth = 148.5mm -\paperheight = 210mm -\textheight = 471pt -\textwidth = 333pt -\oddsidemargin = 0pt -\evensidemargin = \oddsidemargin\oddsidemargin -35.89157pt -\evensidemargin -17.70235pt -\topmargin -55.66684pt -\headheight = 17pt -\headsep = 17pt -\footskip = 24pt -\parskip = 0.5\baselineskip \advance\parskip by 0pt plus 2pt -\parindent = 0pt -\renewcommand\topfraction{.9} -\renewcommand\bottomfraction{.9} -\renewcommand\textfraction{.1} -\columnsep = 5pt -\emergencystretch = 1.5em -\raggedbottom -\clubpenalty = 10000 -\widowpenalty = 10000 -\marginparwidth=1cm -\@ifdefinable\DTK@orig@marginpar{\let\DTK@orig@marginpar\marginpar} -\renewcommand*\marginpar{% - \ClassWarning{dtk}{Command `\string\marginpar' not expected}% - \DTK@orig@marginpar} -\newcommand\DTKgerman{ - \let\DTK@captionsgerman=\captionsgerman - \let\captionsgerman=\DTK@captionsgerman - \@ifundefined{l@ngerman}{}{\selectlanguage{ngerman}}% -} -\newcommand\DTK@captionsgerman{ - \DTK@captionsgerman - \gdef\refname{Literatur}% - \gdef\bibname{Literatur}% - \gdef\contentsname{Inhalt Heft \Volume}% -} -\ifDTK@german@ - \DTKgerman -\fi -\newcommand\addressname{Autoren/Organisatoren} -\newcommand\journalname{Die \TeX nische Kom{\"o}die} -\newcommand\Volume{?/??} -\newcommand\volume{\Volume\ --- Entwurf \today\ - \begingroup - \count1=\time\divide\count1 60 - \count2=\count1 \multiply\count2 -60 \advance\count2\time - \ifnum\count1<10 0\fi\the\count1:\ifnum\count2<10 0\fi\the\count2 - \endgroup -} -\newcommand*\DTK@corr@version{} -\ifDTK@Author@\else - \newcommand*\DTK@today{}% - \begingroup - \count@\time - \divide\count@ 60\relax - \count2=-\count@ - \multiply\count2 60\relax - \advance\count2 \time - %% \loggingall %% Wuduh! - \xdef\DTK@today{% - \the\year-\two@digits{\the\month}-\two@digits{\the\day}% %!!! \the - %\protect~% Warum geht das nicht? - \noexpand\noexpand~% - %% Wuduh! 2 \noexpand noetig? Weil \number\the 2mal zuschlaegt? - %% Ohne \the langt 1 \noexpand! - \two@digits{\the\count@}:\two@digits{\the\count2}}% - %%\show\DTK@today - \endgroup - \ifDTK@Draft@ - \def\DTK@corr@version{\fbox{Korrekturversion:~\DTK@today}}% - \AtEndOfClass{% - \let\ps@empty=\ps@plain - \let\ps@part=\ps@plain}% - \else - \let\@LN\@gobbletwo% Wegen .aux-Datei von vorherigem lineno-Lauf - \let\@LN@col\@gobble - \fi -\fi -\newcommand\footmark{\journalname\ \volume} -\newcommand\ChapterFont{\Large\sf} -\newcommand\SectionFont{\large\sf} -\newcommand\SubsectionFont{\normalsize\sf} -\newcommand\SubsubsectionFont{\normalsize\sf} -\newcommand\AuthorFont{\large\sf} -\newcommand\TitleFont{\Large\sf} -\newcommand\HeadFont{\sf\fontshape{sl}\selectfont} -\newcommand\FootFont{\footnotesize\sf\fontshape{sl}\selectfont} -\newcommand\PagenoFont{\sf} -\newcommand\NewpageThreshold{100pt} -\newcommand\HeadRuleDepth{0pt} -\newcommand\FootRuleDepth{0pt} -\newcommand\ContentsParSkip{1pt} -\newcommand\DTK@math{% - \abovedisplayskip = 4pt plus 2pt minus 1pt - \belowdisplayskip = \abovedisplayskip - \abovedisplayshortskip = 2pt plus 2pt - \belowdisplayshortskip = \abovedisplayshortskip -} -\let\DTK@@normalsize=\@normalsize -\def\@normalsize{% - \DTK@@normalsize - \DTK@math - \let\@listi=\@listI} -\let\DTK@normalsize=\normalsize -\renewcommand\normalsize{% - \DTK@normalsize - \DTK@math - \let\@listi=\@listI} -\normalsize -\let\DTK@small=\small -\renewcommand\small{% - \DTK@small - \DTK@math - \let\@listi=\@listI} -\let\DTK@footnotesize=\footnotesize -\renewcommand\footnotesize{% - \DTK@footnotesize - \DTK@math - \let\@listi=\@listI} -\begingroup -\gdef\Path@SepI{/""} -\gdef\Path@SepII{\symbol{92}""} -\gdef\Path@SepIII{:""} -\catcode`\/=13 -\catcode`\:=13 -\catcode`\^=0 -^catcode`\\=13 -^gdef^Path{^begingroup - ^catcode`^/=13 - ^catcode`^\=13 - ^catcode`^:=13 - ^catcode`^~=12 - ^catcode`^$=12 %$ - ^catcode`^_=12 - ^catcode`^#=12 - ^let/=^Path@SepI - ^let\=^Path@SepII - ^let:=^Path@SepIII - ^@Path} -^gdef^@Path#1{^texttt{#1}^endgroup} -^endgroup -\providecommand\File[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\providecommand\Package[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\providecommand\Program[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\providecommand\Command[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\providecommand\Macro[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\providecommand\Environment[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\providecommand\Email[1]{\texttt{#1}} -%% hv 2006-08-11 -\providecommand*{\nolinkurl}{\url} -\providecommand*{\href}[1]{} -\newcommand*{\CTANurl}[1]{% - \href{ftp://ftp.ctan.org/tex-archive/#1}{\nolinkurl{CTAN:#1}}% -} -\providecommand\Acronym[1]{\textsc{#1}} -\def\@listI{% - \leftmargin = \leftmargini - \parsep = \parskip - \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt - \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt} -\let\@listi=\@listI -\def\@listii{% - \leftmargin = \leftmarginii - \labelwidth = \leftmarginii - \advance \labelwidth by-\labelsep - \parsep = \parskip - \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt - \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt} -\def\@listiii{% - \leftmargin = \leftmarginiii - \labelwidth = \leftmarginiii - \advance \labelwidth by-\labelsep - \partopsep = 1pt plus 0pt minus 1pt - \parsep = \parskip - \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt - \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt} -\@listi -\renewcommand\labelitemi{$\m@th\circ$} -\renewcommand\labelitemii{$\m@th\triangleright$} -\renewcommand\labelitemiii{$\m@th\diamond$} -\setlength\leftmargini{1.5em} -\setlength\leftmarginii{1.4em} -\setlength\leftmarginiii{1.3em} -\setlength\leftmarginiv{1.2em} -\renewenvironment{description}{% - \begin{list}{}{% - \labelwidth = 0pt - \itemindent = -\leftmargin - \parsep = \parskip - \topsep = 0pt plus 2pt - \itemsep = 0pt plus 2pt - \let\makelabel=\descriptionlabel}% - }{\end{list}} -\renewcommand\descriptionlabel[1]{% - \hspace\labelsep{\normalsize\it #1}} -\renewenvironment{quotation}{% - \list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}% - \item\relax -}{\endlist} -\newenvironment{roll}% - {\@ifnextchar[{\r@ll}{\r@ll[0pt]}}% - {\end{list}} -\def\r@ll[#1]{\begin{list}{}{% - \labelwidth = #1 - \leftmargin = \labelwidth - \itemsep = .3ex - \let\makelabel=\rolllabel}% - } -\newcommand\rolllabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep \textbf{#1}\hfill} -\newenvironment{example}{\begin{quote}\small}{\end{quote}} -\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\par\addcontentsline{\csname - ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}{\protect\numberline{\csname - the#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}}\begingroup - \@parboxrestore - \small - \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par - \endgroup} -\setcounter{secnumdepth}{0} -\newif\ifFirstArticle -\FirstArticletrue -\ifDTK@Author@ - \renewcommand\part{% - \typeout{*** Parts can not be used in single articles.}} -\else - \renewcommand\part{% - \clearpage - \thispagestyle{part}% - \FirstArticletrue - \Advance@Label@Prefix - \@ifstar{\part@star{chapter}}{\part@star{part}}} -\fi -\newcommand\part@star[1]{% - \@ifnextchar[{\part@optional{#1}}{\part@normal{#1}}} -\def\part@optional#1[#2]#3{% - \markboth{#2}{#2}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{#2}% - \@ifnextchar[{\part@subtitle{#3}}{\part@nosubtitle{#3}}} -\newcommand\part@normal[2]{% - \markboth{#2}{#2}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{#2}% - \@ifnextchar[{\part@subtitle{#2}}{\part@nosubtitle{#2}}} -\def\part@subtitle#1[#2]{\TopArt{#1}{\\#2}\bigskip\par} -\newcommand\part@nosubtitle[1]{\TopArt{#1}{}\bigskip\par} -\newcommand\TopArtRule{2pt} -\newcommand\TopArt[2]{% - \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\parskip=0pt\parindent=0pt - \null\vspace{18pt}\par\raggedright\large\sf - {\huge\sf #1}\\[-.5ex]\rule{\textwidth}{\TopArtRule}% - \vspace{2pt} #2 - \end{minipage}} -\ifDTK@Author@ - \renewcommand\chapter{% - \typeout{*** Chapters can not be used in single articles.}} -\else - \renewcommand\chapter{% - \@ifnextchar*{\chapter@star}{% - \@ifnextchar[{\chapter@optional}{\chapter@normal}}} -\fi -\def\chapter@star*{\chapter} -\def\chapter@normal#1{\chapter@optional[#1]{#1}} -\def\chapter@optional[#1]{% - \typeout{#1}% - \Advance@Label@Prefix - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}% - \markboth{#1}{#1}% - \FirstArticletrue - \@startsection{chapter}{0}{\z@}{-1ex plus-1ex minus - -.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\ChapterFont}*% - } -\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{% - -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{.5ex plus.2ex}{\SectionFont}} -\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{% - -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsectionFont}} -\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{% - -2ex plus-1ex minus-.2ex}{0.75ex plus.2ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} -\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}{% - 0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} -\renewcommand\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{4}% - {\parindent}{0ex plus1ex minus.2ex}{-.5ex}{\SubsubsectionFont}} -\newcommand\keywords[1]{\def\DTK@keywords{#1}} -\def\DTK@keywords{} -\renewcommand\maketitle{% - \ifDTK@Author@ \thispagestyle{part}\fi - \ifdim\DTKtitle@skip>0pt\vspace{\DTKtitle@skip}\fi - \begingroup - \dimen0=\vsize - \advance\dimen0 by -\pagetotal - \ifdim\dimen0<\NewpageThreshold - \newpage - \global\FirstArticletrue - \fi - \endgroup - \Advance@Label@Prefix - \begingroup - \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} - \ifFirstArticle - \global\FirstArticlefalse - \vskip 3pt - \else - \DTKtitle@sep - \fi - \setcounter{footnote}0 - \@flushglue=0pt plus .3\textwidth\relax - \raggedright - \TitleFont - \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font\relax - \xspaceskip=\fontdimen7\font\relax - \@title - \ifx\@author\@empty\else - \bigskip\par - \AuthorFont\@author - \fi - \end{minipage}% - \@thanks - \let\thanks\@gobble - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@title}% - \markboth{\@title}{\@title}% - \endgroup - \let\@title=\@empty - \let\@author=\@empty - \let\@thanks=\@empty - \setcounter{figure}0 - \setcounter{table}0 - \setcounter{equation}0 - \medskip\par} -\newcommand\DTKtitle@skip{12pt} -\newcommand\DTKtitle@sep{\vspace{32pt plus 8pt minus 16pt}} -\renewcommand\and{, } -\let\@title=\@empty -\let\@author=\@empty -\let\@thanks=\@empty -\newenvironment{abstract}{% - \begin{quote}\small - }{% - \end{quote}\medskip\par} -\renewcommand\thefigure{\arabic{figure}} -\renewcommand\thetable{\arabic{table}} -\renewcommand\theequation{\arabic{equation}} -\newcount\DTL@label -\DTL@label=0 -\newcommand\Advance@Label@Prefix{% - \advance\DTL@label 1 - \xdef\Label@Prefix{module \the\DTL@label:}} -\Advance@Label@Prefix -\let\Ref=\ref -\let\Label=\label -\let\Pageref=\pageref -\renewcommand\ref[1]{\Ref{\Label@Prefix:#1}} -\renewcommand\label[1]{\Label{\Label@Prefix:#1}} -\renewcommand\pageref[1]{\Pageref{\Label@Prefix:#1}} -\renewcommand\thebibliography[1]{% - \section*{\refname}% - \list{[\arabic{enumi}]}{% - \settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}% - \leftmargin\labelwidth - \advance\leftmargin\labelsep - \usecounter{enumi}} - \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em} - \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000 - \sfcode`\.=1000\relax\DTK@bibliography@rightskip} -\newcommand\DTK@bibliography@rightskip{\rightskip=0pt plus 2em} -\newcommand\DTK@bibliography[1]{ - \InputIfFileExists{#1.bbl}{}{\typeout{--- File #1.bbl not found.}}} -\bibliographystyle{dtk} -\newcommand\DTK@fnrightmargin{0em} -\newcommand\DTK@fnleftmargin{1em} -\long\def\@makefntext#1{% - \@nobreaktrue - \begin{list}{}{% - \rightmargin=0pt% - \parsep=0.333\baselineskip plus 2pt - \leftmargin=\DTK@fnleftmargin} - \item\mbox{}% - \llap{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont\@thefnmark}\kern1pt}% - #1% - \end{list}} -\@ifundefined{@textsuperscript}{% - \def\@textsuperscript#1{% - {\m@th\ensuremath{^{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@#1}}}}} -}{} -\renewcommand\footnoterule{% - \kern-3\p@ - \hrule\@width0.333\columnwidth - \kern2.6\p@} -\renewcommand\ps@plain{% - \let\@mkboth=\@gobbletwo - \let\chaptermark=\@gobble - \let\sectionmark=\@gobble - \let\subsectionmark=\@gobble - \def\@oddhead{\vbox{\hbox to \textwidth{% - \let\\=\relax - \HeadFont \rightmark \hfil\PagenoFont\thepage}\kern 3pt - \ifdim\HeadRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\HeadRuleDepth\fi}}% - \def\@evenhead{\vbox{\hbox to \textwidth{% - \let\\=\relax - \PagenoFont \thepage\hfil\HeadFont \leftmark}\kern 3pt - \ifdim\HeadRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\HeadRuleDepth\fi}}% -\iffalse% RN 2005-01-17 - \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\FootFont \footmark\hfil\null}}}% - \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\null\hfil\FootFont \footmark}}}% -\else - \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{% - \FootFont \footmark\hfil\DTK@corr@version\null}}}% - \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{% - \null\FootFont\DTK@corr@version\hfil \footmark}}}% -\fi -} -\let\ps@headings\ps@plain -\newcommand\ps@part{% - \let\@mkboth=\@gobbletwo - \let\chaptermark=\@gobble - \let\sectionmark=\@gobble - \let\subsectionmark=\@gobble - \let\@oddhead=\@empty - \let\@evenhead=\@empty -\iffalse% RN 2005-01-17 - \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\FootFont \footmark\hfil\null}}}% - \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{\null\hfil\FootFont \footmark}}}% -\else - \def\@oddfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{% - \FootFont \footmark\hfil\DTK@corr@version\null}}}% - \def\@evenfoot{\vbox{% - \ifdim\FootRuleDepth>0pt \hrule depth\FootRuleDepth \fi - \kern 5pt \hbox to \textwidth{% - \null\FootFont \DTK@corr@version\hfil\footmark}}}% -\fi -} -\pagestyle{plain} -\ifDTK@Author@ - \AtEndOfClass{%\show\DTK@jobname - \InputIfFileExists{\DTK@jobname.inf}{% - \renewcommand\volume{\Volume}}{}}% -\else - \newcommand\DieTeXnischeKomoedie[3]{% - \thispagestyle{empty}% - \gdef\Volume{#1}% - \xdef\volume{\Volume}%??? - \gdef\DTKedition{#2}% - \gdef\DTKdate{#3}% - \immediate\openout\@unused \jobname.inf\relax - \immediate\write\@unused{% - \string\gdef\string\Volume{#1}^^J% - \string\gdef\string\DTKedition{#2}^^J% - \string\gdef\string\DTKdate{#3}% - }% - \immediate\closeout\@unused - \iffalse% RN 2005-02-20; unnoetig, da localer \jobname usw. - \global\let\bibliography=\DTK@bibliography - \global\let\bibliographystyle=\@gobble - \fi - \CoverArt{#1}{#2}{#3}% - \newpage} -\fi -\newcommand\CoverArt[3]{% - \ifx\CoverTitleFont\@undefined - \newfont\CoverTitleFont{ecrm1700 scaled \magstep 5} - \fi - \ifx\CoverNumberFont\@undefined - \newfont\CoverNumberFont{ecrm1700 scaled 2986} - \fi - \vspace*{-34pt}\hfill - \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to \textheight{\null\hfill\CoverTitleFont - \journalname\hfill\null}% - \@tempdimb=\ht\@tempboxa - \advance\@tempdimb by\dp\@tempboxa - \hbox to\@tempdimb{% - \vbox to\wd\@tempboxa{% - \vskip\wd\@tempboxa - \vss\rotatebox{90}{\box\@tempboxa}}\hss} \ % - \rule{\CoverArt@barwidth}{\textheight} - \begin{minipage}[b]{.7\textwidth}\raggedright - \rule{1em}{0pt}% - \dimen2=\textwidth\advance\dimen2-1em - \parbox{\dimen2}{\CoverArt@font - DANTE\\ - Deutschsprachige\\ - Anwendervereinigung - \TeX\ \eV}\\[1ex] - \dimen3=\textwidth\advance\dimen3-\CoverArt@gap - \hfill\rule{\dimen3}{\CoverArt@linewidth}% - \\[-\baselineskip]\null\hspace{1em}% - {\CoverArt@small\cover@sub{#1}{#2}{#3}}% - \\[-\baselineskip]\rule{0pt}{.617647\textheight}% - \CoverNumberFont - \null\hfill - \makebox(0,0)[br]{% - \textcolor{CoverArt@grey}{% - \CoverArt@strip@no #1;\hspace{1pt}% - }}% - \end{minipage}% -} -\newcommand\cover@sub[3]{% - #2. Jahrgang\quad Heft #1\quad #3% -} -\ifDTK@Author@\else - \definecolor{CoverArt@grey}{gray}{.8} -\fi -\def\CoverArt@strip@no#1/#2;{#1\raisebox{0.35ex}{\CoverTitleFont/}#2} -\newcommand\CoverArt@linewidth{0pt}%{1.2pt} -\newcommand\CoverArt@barwidth{2.41pt} -\newcommand\CoverArt@font{\Large\raggedleft} -\newcommand\CoverArt@small{\footnotesize} -\newcommand\CoverArt@gap{2em} -\chardef\DTK@cat=\the\catcode`\" -\catcode`\"=13 -\newcommand\address[3]{% - \begingroup - \def\"##1{\@ifundefined{detex@@##1}{##1}% - {\csname detex@@##1\endcsname}}% - \ifcat a\noexpand"\else\let"=\"\fi - \def\ss{ss}% - \let\'=\relax - \let\`=\relax - \let\^=\relax - \let\.=\relax - \let\==\relax - \let\d=\relax - \let\b=\relax - \let\c=\relax - \let\v=\relax - \let\H=\relax - \let\t=\relax - \let\u=\relax - \let\~=\relax - \def\o{o}% - \def\O{O}% - \def\aa{aa}% - \def\AA{Aa}% - \def\l{l}% - \def\L{L}% - \def\ae{ae}% - \def\AE{Ae}% - \def\oe{oe}% - \def\OE{Oe}% - \def\TeX{TeX}% - \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% - \def\LaTeXe{LaTeX2e}% - \let\null=\relax - \xdef\@ddress{#2, #1}% - \endgroup - \begingroup - \def\\{\string\\}% - \ifcat a\noexpand"\else\def\"{\string"}\fi - \def"{\string"}% - \def\null{}% - \expandafter\@strip\@ddress$%$ - \iffalse% RN 2005-01-15 - \index{\STRIP@*#1 #2!#3}% - \else - \glossary{\STRIP@*#1 #2!#3}% - \fi - \endgroup -} -\catcode`\"=\DTK@cat -\let\strip@grp={ -\let\strip@end=$%$ -\def\@strip{\def\STRIP@{}\strip@I} -\def\strip@I{\let\strip@next=\strip@I - \futurelet\strip@CHAR\strip@II} -\def\strip@II#1{% - \ifx\strip@CHAR\strip@end - \let\strip@next=\relax - \else\ifx\strip@CHAR\strip@grp - \strip@I #1$%$ - \let\strip@next=\strip@I - \else\ifcat\strip@CHAR A - \xdef\STRIP@{\STRIP@#1}% - \else\ifcat\strip@CHAR. - \xdef\STRIP@{\STRIP@#1}% - \else\ifcat\strip@CHAR\space - \xdef\STRIP@{\STRIP@ #1}% - \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi - \strip@next} -\def\detex@@a{ae} -\def\detex@@o{oe} -\def\detex@@u{ue} -\def\detex@@A{Ae} -\def\detex@@O{Oe} -\def\detex@@U{Ue} -\def\detex@@s{ss} -\ifDTK@Author@\else -\newenvironment{theaddresses}{% - \chapter{\addressname}\Label{addresses} - \begingroup - \columnsep=10pt - \addresssize - \def\addressitem##1##2##3{% - \par - \parbox{\columnwidth}{ - \textbf{##1}\hfill[\ignorespaces ##3]% - \\ ##2}} - \begin{multicols}{2}% - \raggedbottom - \raggedright -}{% - \end{multicols}% - \endgroup - } -\fi -\newcommand\addresssize{\footnotesize\parskip=6pt plus 2pt minus 3pt} -\ifDTK@Author@ - \newcommand\listofaddresses{% - \typeout{*** listofaddresses not supported in articles.}} - \let\makeaddresses\relax% RN 2005-01-15 -\else - \iffalse% RN 2005-01-15 - \newcommand\listofaddresses{% - \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.ind}{}{% - \typeout{No file \jobname.ind.}% - \typeout{Use the following command to create it:\space\space - makeindex -s dtk.ist \jobname}% - \typeout{\space}}% - } - \else - \newcommand\listofaddresses{% - \InputIfFileExists{\jobname.gls}{}{% - \typeout{No file \jobname.gls.}% - \typeout{Use the following command to create it:^^J% - \@spaces makeindex -s dtk.ist -o \jobname.gls \jobname.glo}% - \typeout{\space}}% - } - \let\makeaddresses\makeglossary - \fi -\fi -\ifDTK@Author@ - \renewcommand\tableofcontents{% - \typeout{*** tabelofcontents not supported in articles.}} -\else - \renewcommand\tableofcontents{% - \clearpage - \thispagestyle{empty}% - \markboth{\contentsname}{\contentsname}% - \ContentsArt - \begingroup - \parskip=\ContentsParSkip - \let\\=\relax - \TOC@configure - \@starttoc{toc} - \endgroup - } -\fi -\let\TOC@configure\relax -\newcommand\ContentsArt{% - \vspace*{-\headheight}\vspace*{-\headsep}\vspace*{-2pt} - \begin{minipage}{\textwidth} - \Huge \journalname\\[2pt]% - \rule{\textwidth}{2pt}\\[2pt]% - \null\hfill - \CoverArt@small - \cover@sub{\volume}{\DTKedition}{\DTKdate} - \end{minipage}\vspace{16pt minus 8pt}\par -} -\DeclareFontShape{T1}{cmr}{bdx}{n} - {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12> - <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88> ecrb10 - }{} -\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmr}{bdx}{n} - {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12> - <14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88> cmbdx10 - }{} -\setcounter{tocdepth}{0} -\renewcommand\l@part[2]{% - \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}% - \addvspace{0.5em plus 0pt}% space above part line - \@tempdima 1.5em - \begingroup - \bf - \advance\leftskip\@tempdima - \hskip -\leftskip - #1\par - \penalty\@highpenalty - \endgroup - \addvspace{0.2em}% -} -\renewcommand\l@chapter[2]{% - \begingroup - \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@ - \@afterindenttrue - \interlinepenalty\@M - \@tempdima 1.5em\relax % number width - \@tempdimb 2.5em\relax % indent - \advance\leftskip \@tempdimb - \advance\rightskip \@tempdimb - \noindent\hskip -\leftskip - \hbox to\@tempdimb{#2\hss}% - #1\par - \endgroup} -\iffalse% RN 2005-01-15 -\@ifundefined{DTK@layout}{}{\input dtk\DTK@layout.clo} -\else -\@ifundefined{DTK@layout}{}{\input{dtk\DTK@layout.clo}} -\fi -\IfFileExists{eurosans.sty} -{% - \RequirePackage{eurosans} - %%%\AtBeginDocument{\let\texteuro\euro} - \AtBeginDocument{% - \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\texteuro}{\euro}}% ??? -} -{% - % Das kann jeder. - \let\DTK@texteuro\texteuro - \AtBeginDocument{% - \renewcommand*\texteuro{\textsf{\DTK@texteuro}}} -} -\begingroup - \chardef\x=0 % - % check pdfTeX - \@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{}{% - \ifcase\pdfoutput - \else - \chardef\x=1 % - \fi - }% - % check VTeX - \@ifundefined{OpMode}{}{% - \chardef\x=2 % - }% -\expandafter\endgroup -\ifcase\x - % default case - \AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\the\paperwidth,\the\paperheight}}% -\or - % pdfTeX is running in pdf mode - \pdfpagewidth\paperwidth\pdfpageheight\paperheight -\else - % VTeX is running - \mediawidth\paperwidth\mediaheight\paperheight -\fi - -\AtBeginDocument{% - \begingroup% vielleicht noch intelligenter... - \ttfamily - \@tempdima\fontdimen3\font - \advance\@tempdima\fontdimen4\font - \ifdim\@tempdima>\z@ - \edef\@tempa{\ttdefault}\gdef\ttdefault{cmtt}% - \ClassWarning{dtk}{% - Font `\@tempa' is bad, changed to '\ttdefault'}% - \fi - \endgroup -} -\RequirePackage{makeidx} -\renewenvironment{theindex} - {\begin{multicols}{2}[\section{\indexname}\vspace{-.5\baselineskip}]% - \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax - \columnseprule \z@ - \columnsep=10pt - \raggedbottom\raggedright - \let\item\@idxitem} - {\end{multicols}} -\renewcommand\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@} -\renewcommand\subitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{20\p@}} -\renewcommand\subsubitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{30\p@}} -\renewcommand\indexspace{\par \vskip 6\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus1\p@\relax} - -\newcommand*\DTK@embedded@documentclasshook{} -\newcommand*\AtEmbeddedDocumentclass{% - \g@addto@macro\DTK@embedded@documentclasshook} -\AtEmbeddedDocumentclass{% -%%% \filename@parse{\protect#1}\edef\DTK@local@jobname{\filename@base}%??? - \edef\jobname{\DTK@local@jobname}% -} -\newcommand*\DTK@embedded@begindocumenthook{} -\newcommand*\AtEmbeddedBeginDocument{% - \g@addto@macro\DTK@embedded@begindocumenthook} -\AtEmbeddedBeginDocument{} -\newcommand*\DTK@embedded@enddocumenthook{} -\newcommand*\AtEmbeddedEndDocument{% - \g@addto@macro\DTK@embedded@enddocumenthook} -\AtEmbeddedEndDocument{\endinput} -\newcommand*\DTK@jobname{} -\ifDTK@Author@ - \edef\DTK@jobname{komoedie} -\else - \edef\DTK@jobname{\jobname} -\fi -\newcommand*\DTK@local@jobname{} -\newcommand*\DTK@local@inputname{} -%%%\newcommand*\DTK@PSforPDF{} -\newcommand*\DTK@eat@version[1][]{\ignorespaces} -\newcommand*\DTK@usepackage{} -\newcommand*\DTKinput[1]{% - \begingroup - \filename@parse{#1}% - \edef\DTK@local@jobname{\filename@base}% - \@ifundefined{filename@ext}% - {\IfFileExists{\DTK@local@jobname.ltx}% - {\edef\DTK@local@inputname{\DTK@local@jobname.ltx}}% - {\edef\DTK@local@inputname{\DTK@local@jobname.tex}}% - }% - {\edef\DTK@local@inputname{#1}}% - \renewcommand*\documentclass[2][]{% - %%\edef\jobname{\DTK@local@jobname}% - %%%\let\DTK@PSforPDF\PSforPDF - %\renewcommand\PSforPDF[2][]{}% - %%%\let\PSforPDF\@gobble - \DTK@embedded@documentclasshook - \DTK@eat@version}% - \renewcommand*\usepackage[2][]{% - \@ifnextchar[%] - {\DTK@usepackage{##1}{##2}}% - {\DTK@usepackage{##1}{##2}[]}% - }% - \def\DTK@usepackage##1##2[##3]{% - \edef\@tempb{\zap@space##2 \@empty}% - \@for\@tempa:=\@tempb\do{\def\@tempb{inputenc}% - \ifx\@tempa\@tempb - \edef\@tempa{##1}% - \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else\inputencoding{##1}\fi - \else - \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else\NeedPackage{\@tempa}% - \RecordPackage{##1}\@tempa{##3}\DTK@local@inputname - \fi - \fi}}% - \let\pagestyle\@gobble - \let\thispagestyle\@gobble - \let\nocite\@gobble - \let\listfiles\relax - \let\nofiles\relax - \renewcommand*\AtBeginDocument[1]{% - \typeout{\string\AtBeginDocument\space ignored!}} - \renewcommand*\AtEndDocument[1]{% - \typeout{\string\AtEndDocument\space ignored!}} - \renewenvironment*{document}% - %%%{\let\PSforPDF\DTK@PSforPDF}% - %%%{\endinput}% - {\DTK@embedded@begindocumenthook}% - {\DTK@embedded@enddocumenthook}% - \input{\DTK@local@inputname}% - \endgroup -} -%%%\RequirePackage[final]{ps4pdf} -\@ifdefinable\User@Packages{\newwrite\User@Packages} -\AtBeginDocument{% - %%%\edef\DTK@jobname{\jobname}% - %%%\edef\PfP@container{\DTK@jobname-pics.pdf}% - \ifDTK@Author@\else - \listfiles - \InputIfFileExists{userpackages.tex}% - {\typeout{*************************************^^J% - * File `userpackages.tex' used.^^J% - *************************************}% - \newcommand*\RecordPackage[4]{}% - % warum gibt es kein \@gobblethree? ist jetzt egal! - }% - {% - \immediate\openout\User@Packages userpackages.tex\relax - \begingroup \catcode`\~=\active \let~=\space - \immediate\write\User@Packages{% - \@percentchar\space userpackages.tex^^J% - \@percentchar\space generated by `\jobname'^^J% - \@percentchar\space \DTK@today}% - \endgroup - \AtEndDocument{% - \immediate\closeout\User@Packages\relax}% - \newcommand*\RecordPackage[4]{% - \immediate\write\User@Packages{% - \string\usepackage[##1]{##2}[##3] % - \@percentchar\space From file: ##4}}% - }% - \fi - % RN 2005-03-21 - \@ifpackageloaded{lineno}{% - \ifDTK@Draft@\else - \nolinenumbers - \fi - }{} -} -\def\indexname{Stichwortverzeichnis}% Besser woanders? -\def\printindex{% - \InputIfFileExists{\DTK@jobname.ind}{}{% - \typeout{No file \DTK@jobname.ind.}% - \typeout{Use the following command to create it:^^J% - \@spaces makeindex -s dtk-idx.ist -o \DTK@jobname.ind \DTK@jobname.idx}% - \typeout{\space}}% -} -\@fptop\z@ - -\endinput -%% -%% End of file `dtk.sty'. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk10.clo b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk10.clo new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..67d18dd570e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtk10.clo @@ -0,0 +1,18 @@ + +\ProvidesFile{dtk10.clo} + [2009/11/01 v0.1a dtk class option (RN)] + +\input{dtk.clo} + +\IfFileExists{paralist.sty}{% +\RequirePackage[neverdecrease]{paralist} + \let\itemize\compactitem + \let\enditemize\endcompactitem + \let\enumerate\compactenum + \let\endenumerate\endcompactenum + \let\description\compactdesc + \let\enddescription\endcompactdesc +}{} + +\endinput + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtklogos.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtklogos.sty index 3a43f41a075..8b36218254f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtklogos.sty +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/dtk/dtklogos.sty @@ -77,8 +77,8 @@ %%^^A%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \def\DTKrcs$#1: #2 #3${#2} \def\filename{dtk.dtx} -\xdef\fileversion{\DTKrcs$Revision: 1.10 $} -\xdef\filedate{\DTKrcs$Date: 2007/08/28 18:17:42 $} +\xdef\fileversion{\DTKrcs$Revision: 1.9a $} +\xdef\filedate{\DTKrcs$Date: 2005/10/29 18:17:42 $} \let\docversion=\fileversion \let\docdate=\filedate \ProvidesPackage{dtklogos}[\filedate\space\fileversion\space gene] @@ -122,13 +122,41 @@ \fi \newcommand{\logo@smaller}{\protect\logo@sm@ller} \fi -\renewcommand\TeX{T\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX% - \spacefactor1000 } + +% Tip aus OS X TeX von Peter Dyballa vom 25.9.08 fuer die +% Befehle \XeTeX und \XeLaTeX; das Paket xltxtra fuehrt +% bei mir irgendwie zu Fehlermeldungen... +\providecommand*\TeX@logo@spacing[6]{% + \def\xxt@kern@Te{#1}% + \def\xxt@kern@eX{#2}% + \def\xxt@lower@e{#3}% + \def\xxt@kern@La{#4}% + \def\xxt@kern@aT{#5}% + \def\xxt@kern@eL{#6}% +} +\DeclareRobustCommand\XeTeX{% + \leavevmode + \smash{% + X\lower\xxt@lower@e + \hbox{\kern\xxt@kern@eX + \setbox0=\hbox{E}\dimen0=\ht0\advance\dimen0by\dp0% + \reflectbox{E}% + }\kern\xxt@kern@Te\TeX}}% +\DeclareRobustCommand\XeLaTeX{% + \leavevmode + \smash{% + X\lower\xxt@lower@e + \hbox{\kern\xxt@kern@eX + \setbox0=\hbox{E}\dimen0=\ht0\advance\dimen0by\dp0\relax + \reflectbox{E}% + }\kern\xxt@kern@eL\LaTeX}} +\TeX@logo@spacing{-0.15em}{-0.125em}{0.5ex}{-0.36em}{-0.12em}{-0.13em} +%\providecommand{\XeTeX}{X\kern-.1em\lower.5ex\hbox{\reflectbox{E}}\kern-.15em\TeX} +%\providecommand{\XeLaTeX}{X\kern-.1em\lower.5ex\hbox{\reflectbox{E}}\kern-.15em\LaTeX} \providecommand\AmS{% \(\cal A\)\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox {\(\cal M\)}\kern-.125em{\(\cal S\)}} \providecommand\AMS{\AmS} -\providecommand{\XeTeX}{X\kern-.1em\lower.5ex\hbox{\reflectbox{E}}\kern-.15em\TeX} \providecommand\AmSLaTeX{\AmS-\LaTeX} \providecommand\AMSLaTeX{\AmSLaTeX} \providecommand\AmSTeX{% @@ -159,6 +187,7 @@ \kern-.125em {\the\textfont2 S}-\TeX} \providecommand\LamSTeX{\LAMSTeX} \providecommand\LAmSTeX{\LAMSTeX} +\providecommand\La{L\kern-.36em\raise.3ex\hbox{\sc a}} \providecommand\LaTeX{% L\kern-.36em\raise.3ex\hbox{\sc a}\kern-.15em\TeX} \providecommand\LATEX{\LaTeX} @@ -243,12 +272,12 @@ \providecommand\WinEdtKK{\mbox{\textsf{WinEdt2k}}}% \providecommand{\LyX}{L\kern-.1667em\lower.25em\hbox{Y}\kern-.125emX\@} \providecommand*{\exTeX}{% - \textrm{% das Logo grundsätzlich serifenbehaftet + \textrm{% das Logo grunds^^e4tzlich serifenbehaftet \ensuremath{\textstyle\varepsilon_{\kern-0.15em\mathcal{X}}}% \kern-.15em\TeX }% } - \providecommand\eV{e.V\kern-.18em\@ifnextchar.{}{.}} +\providecommand\eV{e.V\kern-.18em\@ifnextchar.{}{.}} \providecommand\dante{DANTE \eV} \providecommand\Dante{DANTE, Deutschsprachige Anwendervereinigung \TeX~\eV} @@ -267,7 +296,7 @@ \hbox{$\cal N\kern-0.35em\lower0.5ex\hbox{$\cal T$}\kern-0.2emS$}} \providecommand\eTeX{{\leavevmode\hbox{$\varepsilon$}-\TeX}} \providecommand*{\ExTeX}{% RN 2005-01-15 - \textrm{% das Logo grundsätzlich serifenbehaftet + \textrm{% das Logo grunds^^e4tzlich serifenbehaftet \ensuremath{\textstyle\varepsilon_{\kern-0.15em\mathcal{X}}}% \kern-.15em\TeX }% @@ -283,9 +312,34 @@ {\providecommand*\DANTE[1][]{DANTE}} \providecommand*\ConTeXt{Con\TeX t} \providecommand*\conTeXt{con\TeX t} -\providecommand\Thanh{H\`an Th\^e\protect\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{\relax}}} Th\`anh} \providecommand*\MiKTeX{MiK\TeX} \providecommand*\MikTeX\MiKTeX +% +\providecommand\ThanhVN{H\`an Th\^e\protect\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{}}}} +\providecommand\ThanhNN{Th\`anh} +\providecommand\Thanh{H\`an Th\^e\protect\llap{\raise 0.5ex\hbox{\'{\relax}}} Th\`anh} + +\TeX@logo@spacing{-0.15em}{-0.15em}{0.5ex}{-0.36em}{-0.15em}{-0.1em} + +\DeclareRobustCommand\XeTeX{% + \leavevmode + \smash{% + X\lower\xxt@lower@e + \hbox{\kern\xxt@kern@eX + \setbox0=\hbox{E}\dimen0=\ht0\advance\dimen0by\dp0% + \raise\dimen0\hbox{\rotatebox{180}{\box0}}% + }\kern\xxt@kern@Te\TeX}}% + +\DeclareRobustCommand\XeLaTeX{% + \leavevmode + \smash{% + X\lower\xxt@lower@e + \hbox{\kern\xxt@kern@eX + \setbox0=\hbox{E}\dimen0=\ht0\advance\dimen0by\dp0\relax + \raise\dimen0\hbox{\rotatebox{180}{\box0}}% + }\kern\xxt@kern@eL\LaTeX}} +% +% \endinput %% %% End of file `dtklogos.sty'. diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check index 3a3cab4e21f..0f8bf9069be 100755 --- a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check +++ b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ my @TLP_working = qw( dnaseq doc-pictex docmfp docmute doi doipubmed dot2texi dotarrow dotseqn dottex doublestroke dox dozenal dpfloat dprogress drac draftcopy - draftwatermark dramatist dratex drv dtxgallery + draftwatermark dramatist dratex drv dtk dtxgallery dtxtut duerer-latex duotenzor dvdcoll dviasm dviincl dvipdfmx-def dvipsconfig dyntree ean13isbn easy easylist diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds index 0451342e778..05ddb2367c7 100755 --- a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds +++ b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds @@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ $Master = "$mydir/../.."; 'dps', "die 'skipping, requires acrotex'", 'draftmark', "die 'skipping, nosell license'", 'dropping', "die 'skipping, nosell license'", - 'dtk', "&MAKEflatten", +# 'dtk', "&MAKEflatten", 'dtxtut', "&setup", # straight copy 'easy', "&MAKEeasy", 'easylatex', "die 'skipping, complicated perl modules, sorry'", |